Você está na página 1de 346

SWP 9400AWY R2.0 C.T.

OPERATOR’S HDBK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

HANDBOOK STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

SECTION 1: INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1–1 : GENERAL ON EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND SWP INSTALLATION AND
MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1–1.1 Main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1–1.2 First SWP installation in PC and NE environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1–1.3 How to check ECT and NE versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1–1.4 Common situations requiring ECT and/or NE upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1–1.5 Flash Card related special procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1–1.6 NE configuration data change and save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1–1.7 Craft Terminal related special procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1–2 SWP INSTALLATION IN PC ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31


1–2.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1–2.1.1 PC characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1–2.1.2 Operator skills and privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1–2.2 Reference Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1–2.3 Summary of SW installation / de–installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1–2.4 SWP loading in PC WINDOWS–NT / 2000 / XP (Professional Edition only)
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1–2.4.1 Important warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1–2.4.2 Summary of installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . 33
1–2.4.3 CT Products installation guided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

03 060206 0000029168 V.FOSSATI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE

02 051109 0000023753 A.BESTETTI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE


V.FOSSATI G.ZILIANI – RTT
01 050510 A.BESTETTI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE
V.FOSSATI G.ZILIANI – RTT
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

9400AWY REL.2.0

OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 1 / 340

340
1–2.4.4 Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1–2.4.5 CT Products automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1–2.4.6 End of SW installation from SWP CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1–2.5 CT initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


1–2.5.1 Craft Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
1–2.5.2 Craft Terminal connection to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1–2.6 De–installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

1–3 SWP DOWNLOAD TOWARD NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67


1–3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1–3.1.1 Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1–3.1.2 NE state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1–3.1.3 Operator skills and profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1–3.2 Summary of the SWP installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1–3.3 SW download to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1–3.4 Activation of the new Software Package on the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1–3.5 MIB save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

1–4 ECT & NE UPGRADE TO A NEW SWP ’VERSION’ (SAME SWP ’RELEASE’) . . . . . . . . . . 79

1–5 SYSTEM HARDWARE UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81


1–5.1 Upgrade from 1+0 to 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1–5.2 Flash Card upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1–5.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1–5.2.2 Summary procedure for both stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1–5.2.3 Ordering the new Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1–5.2.4 Installation of a new Flash Card fully configured in factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1–5.2.5 Installation of a new Flash Card not configured in factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2–1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2–1.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2–1.2 NE management states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2–1.3 NE supervision, login, logoff and switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2–1.3.1 NE Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2–1.3.2 NE Logoff or switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2–1.4 9400AWY view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2–1.4.1 View Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2–1.4.2 Resource Tree Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2–1.4.3 Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2–1.4.4 Button Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2–1.5 Introduction to the menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2–1.5.1 Views menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2–1.5.2 Configuration menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2–1.5.3 Diagnosis menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2–1.5.4 Supervision menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2–1.5.5 Download menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

2–2 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107


2–2.1 NE Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2–2.2 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

2–2.2.1 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110


2–2.2.2 NTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2–2.2.3 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 2 / 340

340
2–2.2.4 IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2–2.2.5 Routing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2–2.3 Alarm Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2–2.3.1 How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2–2.4 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2–2.4.1 NE Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


2–2.4.2 Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2–2.5 Quick Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
2–2.6 Profiles management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2–2.6.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2–2.6.2 Change Password procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2–2.6.3 Users Management procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

2–3 EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


2–3.1 IDU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2–3.1.1 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2–3.1.2 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2–3.1.3 Board level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2–3.2 ODU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2–3.3 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2–3.3.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2–3.3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2–3.3.3 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

2–4 LINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161


2–4.1 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2–4.1.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2–4.1.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

2–5 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171


2–5.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2–5.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2–5.2.1 Local or Remote Transmitter Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2–5.2.2 ODU service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2–5.2.3 Alarm Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2–5.3 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2–5.3.1 Frequency menu in Rel. 2.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2–5.3.2 Frequency menu from Rel. 2.0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
2–5.4 RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2–5.4.1 ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2–5.4.2 RTPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
2–5.5 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
2–5.5.1 How to read a Power Measurement file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

2–6 EXTERNAL POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185


2–6.1 Input External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
2–6.2 Output External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

2–7 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189


2–7.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
2–7.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

2–7.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state . . . . . . 190
2–7.2 Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2–7.3 MIB Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2–7.3.1 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 3 / 340

340
2–7.3.2 Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2–7.3.3 Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2–7.3.4 Remove file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2–7.4 SW key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2–8 PROTECTION SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
2–8.1 Mux/Demux Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
2–8.1.1 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2–8.1.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2–8.2 Radio Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2–8.2.1 Rx Static Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
2–8.2.2 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2–8.2.3 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2–8.3 HST Transmission Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
2–8.3.1 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
2–8.3.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

2–9 LOOPBACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207


2–9.1 Available Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2–9.1.1 1+0 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2–9.1.2 1+1 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
2–9.2 How to activate a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2–9.3 How to remove a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

2–10 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217


2–10.1 Log Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2–10.2 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2–10.3 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2–10.4 Summary Block Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2–10.5 Current Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

2–11 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223


2–11.1 General information on the performance monitoring process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
2–11.2 Performance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2–11.3 CD (Current Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2–11.3.1 CD parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2–11.3.2 CD Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2–11.4 HD (History Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2–11.4.1 HD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2–11.5 Threshold tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2–11.5.1 How to change a threshold table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2–11.5.2 How to create a threshold table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
2–11.5.3 Threshold table association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

2–12 SW DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233


2–12.1 Server Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
2–12.2 Init SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
2–12.3 SW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

2–13 MIB MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237


2–13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2–13.2 MIB management at Network Element Synthesis level and examples . . . . . . . . . . . 238
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

2–13.2.1 MIB back–up on ECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238


2–13.2.2 MIB save to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
2–13.2.3 MIB load from disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 4 / 340

340
2–13.2.4 MIB restore from ECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

SECTION 3: NE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3–1 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

3–1.1 Purpose of this procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245


3–1.2 Corrective Maintenance general flow–chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
3–1.3 Troubleshooting organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
3–1.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
3–1.4.1 Alarm synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
3–1.4.2 Details on alarms / statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
3–1.5 Warnings on the troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
3–1.5.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
3–1.5.2 Analog measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
3–1.5.3 NMS 64 kbit/s V.11 and G.703 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
3–1.5.4 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
3–1.5.5 Empty USM icon in NES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
3–1.5.6 NE unreachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
3–1.5.7 Configuration change from 4 QAM to 16 QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
3–1.5.8 Quick configuration menu correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
3–1.5.9 Abnormal condition list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
3–1.5.10 Tx Mute functionality for interferences investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
3–1.5.11 Tributaries 9 to 16 visible in “8E1/DS1_Ethernet” configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
3–1.6 Description of alarms and of probable causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
3–1.7 Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

3–2 SPARE FLASH CARD MANAGEMENT AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . 263


3–2.1 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
3–2.2 Flash Card replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
3–2.2.1 Flash Card replacement with a spare flash card “specific” for the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
3–2.2.2 Flash Card replacement with a “generic” spare flash card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267


4–1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.0 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4–1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4–1.2 Software product list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4–1.3 OEM Software licence list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

4–2 SWP REG.9400AWY R.2.0 V2.0.0 SPECIFIC INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271


4–2.1 ECT requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4–2.2 Reference Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4–2.3 SWP version specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4–2.3.1 SW Package Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4–2.3.2 SW Package Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4–2.3.3 ECT SW Sub–Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4–2.3.4 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4–2.4 New features and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4–2.5 Restrictions and known problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

4–3 SWP REG.9400AWY R.2.0 V2.0.1 SPECIFIC INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275


4–3.1 ECT requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

4–3.2 Reference Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275


4–3.3 Equipment hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4–3.4 SWP version specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 5 / 340

340
4–3.4.1 SW Package Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4–3.4.2 SW Package Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4–3.4.3 ECT SW Sub–Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4–3.4.4 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


4–3.5 New features and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
4–3.6 Restrictions and known problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

4–4 SWP REG.9400AWY R.2.0 V2.0.2 SPECIFIC INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283


4–4.1 ECT requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4–4.2 Reference Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4–4.3 Equipment hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4–4.4 SWP version specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4–4.4.1 SW Package Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4–4.4.2 SW Package Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4–4.4.3 ECT SW Sub–Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4–4.4.4 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4–4.5 New features and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4–4.6 Restrictions and known problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287


APPENDIX A : EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
A.1 : Functions and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
A.2 : IDU and ODU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
A.2.1 : IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
A.2.2 : ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
A.2.3 : Allowed Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
A.2.4 : Remote Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
A.3 : Equipment Protection Switching Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
A.4 : External Points Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

APPENDIX B : SW ALLOCATION, FLASH CARD AND EQUIPMENT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . 299


B.1 : Allocation of equipment and craft terminal software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
B.2 : Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B.2.1 : Flash Card types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B.2.2 : Flash Card identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B.2.3 : Flash Card content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
B.3 : Equipment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
B.3.1 : Interfaces (see Fig. 180. on page 289): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
B.3.2 : Operator–Equipment Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
B.3.3 : ECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
B.3.4 : RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

APPENDIX C : ECT–EQUIPMENT CONNECTION VIA PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE


NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
C.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
C.2 : Certified equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
C.3 : Connection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
C.4 : Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
C.4.1 : Setting of Sportster Flash Modem & 3Com 56K Faxmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
C.4.2 : TD–32 AC Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

C.5 : PC laptop “Dell Latitude” setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317


C.6 : Setting up the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
C.7 : Changing the ECT–equipment connection speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
C.7.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 6 / 340

340
C.7.2 : Configuration at PC side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

APPENDIX D : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321


D.1 : Handbook guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.1.1 : Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

D.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323


D.1.3 : Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
D.2 : Documentation set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
D.2.1 : 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
D.2.2 : Additional documentation for 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
D.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
D.3.1 : Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
D.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

APPENDIX E : ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

APPENDIX F : GLOSSARY OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 7 / 340

340
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Fig. 1. Main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 2. Software management main phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Fig. 3. How to check ECT version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 4. How to check NE SW version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 5. Windows NT installation step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 6. Windows NT installation step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 7. Windows NT installation step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 8. Windows NT configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 9. Windows NT configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 10. Windows NT configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 11. Windows NT configuration step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 12. Windows NT configuration step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 13. Windows NT configuration step 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 14. Windows 2000 installation step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 15. Windows 2000 installation step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 16. Windows 2000 installation step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 17. Windows 2000 installation step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 18. Windows 2000 installation step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 19. Windows 2000 configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 20. Windows 2000 configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fig. 21. Windows 2000 configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fig. 22. Windows XP installation step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 23. Windows XP installation step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 24. Windows XP installation step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 25. Windows XP installation step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 26. Windows XP installation step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 27. Windows XP configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 28. Windows XP configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 29. Windows XP configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 30. Windows XP configuration step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 31. De–installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 32. IDU expansion from (1+0) to (1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fig. 33. Network Element Synthesis Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 34. NE in supervised state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 35. Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 36. NE Stop Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 37. 9400AWY Main view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 38. View Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 39. Resource tree area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 40. Tab panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 41. NE Time dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 42. Network Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fig. 43. Local Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 44. NTP Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 45. Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 46. Ethernet Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 47. IP configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 48. IP static routing configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115


Fig. 49. Create Static routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 50. Point To Point Interface Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 8 / 340

340
Fig. 51. OSPF Area configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 52. Create New OSPF Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 53. IP Address configuration of Point–To–Point Interfaces screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fig. 54. Routing information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fig. 55. Alarm Severities Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 56. Name of a cloned alarm profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124


Fig. 57. Clone of an Alarm Severity Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 58. Selection of a new severity in the Service Affecting field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 59. Selection of a new severity in the No Service Affecting field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Fig. 60. System Settings: NE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fig. 61. Confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 62. USM closing warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 63. Overhead Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 64. Quick Configuration Procedure: NE Configuration (Step 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fig. 65. Quick Configuration Procedure: Frame Configuration (Step 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 66. Quick Configuration Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fig. 67. Quick Configuration Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 68. Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5 in Rel. 2.0.0) . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 69. Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5 from Rel. 2.0.1) . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 70. Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP Address (Step 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 71. Quick Configuration Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fig. 72. Quick Configuration Procedure: IP Static Router Configuration (Step 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 73. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS–RF Interface Configuration (Step 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fig. 74. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS–V11 Interface Configuration (Step 10) . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fig. 75. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS–G703 Interface Configuration (Step 11) . . . . . . . . . 143
Fig. 76. Quick Configuration Procedure: Ethernet Configuration (Step 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fig. 77. Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fig. 78. Profile Management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fig. 79. Changing Password screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fig. 80. Users Management screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 81. Users Management help screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 82. 1+0 Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fig. 83. 1+1 Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fig. 84. 1+0 IDU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fig. 85. 1+1 IDU/MAIN Ch#1 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fig. 86. 1+1 IDU Ch#0 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fig. 87. Main board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Fig. 88. ODU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fig. 89. Alarm tab panel for a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 90. Configuration tab panel for a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 91. Remote Inventory tab panel for a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 92. Line Interface View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 93. Line Interface View: E1 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 94. Line Interface View: E3 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 95. Line Interface View: DS1 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 96. Line Interface View: DS3 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 97. Line Interface View: NMS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 98. Line Interface View: Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 99. Line Interface View: Ethernet Port auto–negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fig. 100. Radio Domain View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 101. Radio Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172


Fig. 102. Radio Frequency menu in Rel. 2.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 103. Radio Frequency menu from Rel. 2.0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 104. Not standard frequency arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 9 / 340

340
Fig. 105. Rtpc & Atpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fig. 106. Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fig. 107. Power Measurement Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fig. 108. Power Meas Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Fig. 109. Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 110. Example of “Power Measurement File Reading“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fig. 111. Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fig. 112. Input External Point View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fig. 113. Output External Points: CP01 ... CP04 (Manual activation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fig. 114. Output External Points: CP01 ... CP04 (Automatic activation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fig. 115. Output External Points View: FAIL IDU, FAIL ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fig. 116. Configuration of the Craft access state from the Equipment NE view in the OS mode . . 189
Fig. 117. Restart NE call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fig. 118. Restart NE confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fig. 119. MIB Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fig. 120. Backup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fig. 121. Restore screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fig. 122. Activate command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fig. 123. SW key screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fig. 124. Protection Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fig. 125. Mux Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 126. Mux Protection Switch (Spare #0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fig. 127. Mux Protection Switch (Main #1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fig. 128. Radio Protection View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 129. Rx Static Delay menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fig. 130. Radio Protection Switch (Spare #0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fig. 131. Radio Protection Switch (Main #1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fig. 132. Transmission Protection View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fig. 133. Tx Protection Commands (Spare #0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fig. 134. Tx Protection Commands (Main #1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fig. 135. 1+0 available loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fig. 136. Channel 1 Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fig. 137. Tributaries Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fig. 138. 1+0 Loopback types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fig. 139. 1+1 available loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fig. 140. Channel 1 Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fig. 141. Tributaries Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fig. 142. 1+1 Loopback types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fig. 143. Loopback activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fig. 144. Loopback removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 145. Diagnosis menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 146. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 without Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 147. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 with Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 148. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HST without Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Fig. 149. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HST with Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Fig. 150. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 FD without Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fig. 151. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 FD with Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fig. 152. Radio sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fig. 153. Anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITU–T G.826 . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fig. 154. Performance View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 155. Threshold table association screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226


Fig. 156. Current Data View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fig. 157. History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fig. 158. Threshold table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 10 / 340

340
Fig. 159. Thresholds Table creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fig. 160. Server access configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fig. 161. Init Software Download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fig. 162. SW Status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fig. 163. SW Unit Status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 164. Allowed MIB management tasks at “NE logged–in” level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fig. 165. Allowed MIB management tasks at “Network Element Synthesis” level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fig. 166. Launch of MIB save to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 167. MIB save to disk – phase 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 168. MIB save to disk – phase 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fig. 169. Correspondence between MIB saved folder and MIB saved name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fig. 170. Launch of MIB load from disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fig. 171. MIB load from disk – phase 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fig. 172. MIB load from disk – phase 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fig. 173. Corrective Maintenance general flow–chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fig. 174. Active alarm screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fig. 175. Abnormal condition list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fig. 176. Tx Mute functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fig. 177. Tributaries 9 to 16 visible in “8E1/DS1_Ethernet” configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fig. 178. 9400AWY R.2.0 split–mount system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fig. 179. Possible configurations of ODU (1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 180. MAIN Unit front side: interfaces for equipment control and Flash–Card–label position . . 299
Fig. 181. MAIN Unit back side: Flash Card position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Fig. 182. Flash Card profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Fig. 183. Equipment main parts containing local SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Fig. 184. Flash Card content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fig. 185. ECT–Equipment connection via Public Switched Telephone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fig. 186. ECT–Local external Modem cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fig. 187. F Interface–Remote Modem cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fig. 188. TD–32 AC modem dip–switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fig. 189. Alcatel Lower Layers utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Fig. 190. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fig. 191. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

TABLES
Tab. 1. Additional feature and SWP–version relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tab. 2. Flash card upgrade carried out by one operator only for both stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tab. 3. Radio application: Market, capacity and modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tab. 4. ATPC Range Rx Threshold for ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tab. 5. ATPC Range Rx Threshold for ANSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tab. 6. Command priority list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Tab. 7. Command priority list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Tab. 8. Command priority list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Tab. 9. 1+0 loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tab. 10. 1+1 loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Tab. 11. SES Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tab. 12. Alarm Synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tab. 13. Alarm information, general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tab. 14. General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions . . . . . . . 260
Tab. 15. Software products part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Tab. 16. Software licence part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Tab. 17. Markets, tributaries and modulations forecasted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290


Tab. 18. Shelves Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Tab. 19. Allowed board/plug–in types in IDU Main shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 11 / 340

340
Tab. 20. Allowed board/plug–in types in IDU Extension shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tab. 21. Characteristics of the protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tab. 22. Available Flash cards for 9400AWY Rel.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Tab. 23. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (IDU basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Tab. 24. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with 9–16 E1/DS1 plug–in) . . 304

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Tab. 25. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with E3/DS3 plug–in) . . . . . . . 305
Tab. 26. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with Ethernet plug–in) . . . . . . . 306
Tab. 27. 9400 AWY family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Tab. 28. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Tab. 29. 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tab. 30. Handbooks contained in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tab. 31. Documentation common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . 329
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 12 / 340

340
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a) Warranty
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

handbook refers to.


ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

b) Information

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.

c) Copyright Notification

The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

d) Safety recommendations

The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:

1) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.

2) Access to the Equipment


Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.

3) Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are not indicated in this manual, but in the Technical Handbook
(see Tab. 30. on page 328). The warning labels that can be found on the equipment parts are
indicated on page 16.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in such handbook
should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in such manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in the above
cited manual will prevail.

e) Service Personnel skill


Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.D.2 on page 327 is usually
not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 13 / 340

340
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY

Tab. 1. Additional feature and SWP–version relationship

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This handbook describes SWP 9400AWY Rel.2.0, taking into account all system features that are made
available by first SWP version V2.0.0, as well as by successive SWP releases–versions. This table
sums–up the major additional features (mainly related to new HW items and relevant performance) that
are available starting from a certain SWP–version successive to first SWP version V2.0.0.
Available from
Additional feature
SWP–version
New 48/60V and 24V PSU ETSI IDU Main and Extension units, with different
mandatory from
’3DB xxxxx AB––’ P/N
V2.0.1
(refer to para.1–3.1.2 point [2] on page 67)
7–8 GHz ODUs (new 9470AWY product) N.B.
Frequency shifter management (refer to para.2–5.3.2.2 on page 175)
V2.0.2
Profiles management (refer to para.2–2.6 on page 146
New full–range (24–60V) IDU Main and Extension units N.B.
ANSI version (DS1/DS3) interfaces and relevant ANSI IDU Main and Extension
units and Plug–Ins N.B. V2.0.3
to be confirmed
ANSI version ODUs N.B.
N.B. the claimed item management must be meant from SWP–version point of view, independently
from actual availability of related HW items.
In particular, take into account that, on issue date of this handbook, IDU MAIN and
EXTENSION units for 24–60V power supply are not available.

Ed.03 of this handbook is validated in conjunction with SWP versions V2.0.0 to V2.0.2
only. Information relevant to SWP versions > V2.0.2 , if any, must be considered
preliminary, subject to change and without any obligation on the part of ALCATEL.

For detailed information regarding handbook applicability, purpose and history, please refer to para.D.1
on page 321.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 14 / 340

340
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
Information in this handbook is divided into the following parts:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a) FRONT MATTER
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• TABLE OF CONTENTS
• LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
• PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
• HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
• SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
• CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• QUICK GUIDE
It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information
contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks.

b) SECTION 1: INSTALLATION on page 21


This part describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and upgrading (ECT
parts and equipment parts) and those to upgrade the 9400AWY system from (1+0) to (1+1)
configuration or replace the Flash Card to improve system capacity.

c) SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT on page 89


In this section, the description of the menu structure and of all the NE functionalities available in the
Craft Terminal is given.

d) SECTION 3: NE MAINTENANCE on page 243


In this section the description of the NE troubleshooting based on the use of the Craft Terminal is
given.

e) SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS on page 267


This section gives information on the Software Packages this handbook refers to, and that are both
independent and independent on the specific SWP Version: commercial information (SWP and
Software Licences P/Ns), PC requirements, SW Package Identification, SW Package Components,
ECT SW Sub–Component, NE MIB Compatibility and additional features of new SWP versions.

f) SECTION 5: APPENDICES on page 287


In this section some additional information and instructions are given:
• Equipment description and components
• SW allocation, Flash Card and equipment control

• ECT–Equipment connection via public switched telephone network


• Documentation Guide
• Acronyms and abbreviations
• Glossary of terms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 15 / 340

340
SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
a) Please refer to Technical Handbook (from ED.03) to obtain details regarding following information:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


• Compliance with European norms

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
• Safety rules:

TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT


General rules

Dangerous Electrical Voltages

Equipment connection to earth

Risk of explosion

Moving mechanical parts

Heat–radiating mechanical parts

Equipment emitting RF power (EMF norms)

• Other labels:

TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges

2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and


Electronic Equipment) Logo

• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

• Other Labels affixed to the Equipment

b) Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, Work–Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

loaded with software applications described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructor’s
technical documentation.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 16 / 340

340
CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
a) Unit assemblies
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Each of the IDU MAIN UNIT and IDU EXTENSION UNIT is assembled inside its own box and must
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly
is supplied by Alcatel “as it is” and must never be disassembled .

b) Antistatic protection device kit

When operating on boards out of the equipment shelf, this kit (see figure below) must be always warn
and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoids the possible damage of the
electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.

ELASTICIZED BAND

COILED CORD

c) Screw fixing

In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable fixing, etc.) must be always
tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMI–EMC performance.
The screw tightening torque must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m)  10 %


2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb)  10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.

d) IDU–ODU cable disconnection / connection

Before to disconnect or connect the IDU–ODU cable (at IDU or ODU side) switch off the
corresponding MAIN IDU UNIT or EXTENSION IDU UNIT.

e) Craft Terminal connection

To connect the CT cable (at IDU’s F interface and/or PC side):


• verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off
it)
• connect suitable cable to IDU’s F interface and PC side
• now the PC can be safely switched on.

f) Craft Terminal disconnection

To disconnect the CT cable (at IDU’s F interface and/or PC side):


• perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications
• close all other running applications, if any
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• switch off the PC


• now the cable can be safely disconnected.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 17 / 340

340
QUICK GUIDE
C.T. OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK SWP 9400AWY R.2.0

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


If you need immediate operative information on how to:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
GENERAL TOPICS

get information on system


read Appendix D on page 321
documentation

get information on safety, EMC,


EMF, ESD norms and equipment read page 16
labelling
acknowledge cautions to avoid
read page 17
equipment damage

read:

Chapter 4–1 on page 269


have the description of the system
from the software point of view Appendix A on page 289

Appendix B on page 299

logically configure a station (or


change its configuration) and
logically set–up connections

logically provision equipment boards

get item P/Ns

get operative information regarding get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook and read its
the units in IDU shelf and ODU QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
(connectors, leds, buttons)

set and use the EOW functions of


the equipment

know the consequences of unit


extraction in IDU shelf

continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 18 / 340

340
.. continues
If you need immediate operative information on how to:

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

install and commission equipment


hardware and software, as delivered read para.1–1.1 on page 24
from Alcatel factory

LOGIN & LOGOFF (AFTER INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING)

login proceed as specified in para.2–1.3.1 on page 92

logoff proceed as specified in para.2–1.3.2 on page 95

change own password (for all users,


proceed as specified in para.2–2.6.2 on page 148
from SWP version 2.0.2)

manage usernames and passwords


of all users (for administrator only, proceed as specified in para.2–2.6.3 on page 149
from SWP version 2.0.2)

set–up a remote connection


between CT and equipment, through
proceed as specified in Appendix C on page 311
a switched telephone line of the
standard Public Telephone Network.

ECT SOFTWARE USAGE FOR EQUIPMENT SW MANAGEMENT


(AFTER INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING)

have an overview on menu tree


structure
open SECTION 2 – NE MANAGEMENT on page 89 of this
manage equipment configuration handbook and then search the information according to the
set–up parameters for maintenance listed topics

use functions for SW management

continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 19 / 340

340
.. continues
If you need immediate operative information on how to:
SYSTEM UPGRADE

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
upgrade ECT and equipment with a
newer SWP version proceed as specified in chapter 1–4 on page 79
(same SWP release)

install a tributary plug–in on IDU get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook and read its
Main and/or Extension unit QUICK GUIDE (same topic)

upgrade system configuration from


proceed as specified in para.1–5.1 on page 81
(1+0) to (1+1)
replace Flash Card to improve
proceed as specified in para.1–5.2 on page 82
system capacity

MAINTENANCE

provision and manage spare parts


get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook and read its
QUICK GUIDE (same topic)
carry out preventive maintenance

get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook, and go to its


section MAINTENANCE chapter Second Level
Maintenance paragraph Corrective Maintenance and
proceed as specified; in any case, such section will usually
lead to the SECTION 3 – NE MAINTENANCE on page 243
of this handbook to carry out troubleshooting via Craft
carry out corrective maintenance
Terminal.

Alternatively, access directly SECTION 3 – NE


MAINTENANCE on page 243 of this handbook and proceed
as specified.

To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please refer to the TABLE OF
CONTENTS of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 20 / 340

340
SECTION 1: INSTALLATION

SECTION CONTENT PAGE


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Chapter 1–1 – General on equipment installation and SWP installation and


management
This chapter introduces the basic information regarding the main phases for 23
9400AWY HW and SW installation, and those regarding the software management,
with particular emphasis on SWP release and versions upgrading situations.

Chapter 1–2 – SWP installation in PC environment


This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the PC
31
environment, or to upgrade it with a new version of the same SWP, or to de–install the
SWP components from the PC.

Chapter 1–3 – SWP download toward NE


This chapter details all phases necessary to download inside the NE equipment
67
environment, and then activate, a SWP having a version greater than that presently
loaded in the NE’s Flash Card.

Chapter 1–4 – CT & NE Upgrade to a new SWP “version” (same SWP “release”)
This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP ’version’ in the PC
79
environment as well as in the equipment environment.
N.B. Procedure not meaningful for first version (V2.0.0) of the SWP.

Chapter 1–5 – System hardware upgrade


This chapter details all phases necessary to upgrade 9400AWY system from (1+0) 81
to (1+1) configuration or replace the Flash Card to improve system capacity.

The symbol points out references to the other Handbooks.

Referenced handbook P/Ns are given in para.D.2 on page 327.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 21 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
22 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1–1 : GENERAL ON EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND SWP INSTALLATION
AND MANAGEMENT

This chapter introduces the basic information regarding the main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

installation, and those regarding the software management, with particular emphasis on SWP release and
versions upgrading situations.

N.B. Before reading this chapter, it is suggested to read Appendix B on page 299.

N.B. Please refer to para.D.3.2 on page 331 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch
Level.

Information given in the following is:

– Main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW installation on page 24

– First SWP installation in PC and NE environments on page 25

– How to check ECT and NE SWP versions on page 27

– Common situations requiring ECT and/or NE upgrade on page 29

– Flash Card related special procedures on page 29

– NE configuration data change and save on page 30

– Craft Terminal related special procedures on page 30


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 23 / 340

340
1–1.1 Main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW installation

The summary procedure depicted in Fig. 1. below presumes that the SWP version loaded in factory inside
the NE’s Flash Card corresponds to that of the SWP CD–ROM delivered to Customer with the equipment.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
HW INSTALLATION ECT INSTALLATION
described in: described in:

9400AWY Chapter 1–2 – SWP installation in PC


Installation Handbook environment on page 31 of this handbook

EQUIPMENT POWER–ON AND COMMISSIONING


described in:
9400AWY
Line–Up Guide

NE CONFIGURATION DATA SAVE


described in para.1–1.6 on page 30
of this chapter

Fig. 1. Main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW installation


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 24 / 340

340
1–1.2 First SWP installation in PC and NE environments

Fig. 2. depicts the main phases for SW management, when it is loaded the first time in PC and NE
environments.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SWP
CD–ROM

1) SWP LOADING IN PC
MS–NT ENVIRONMENT

CRAFT TERMINAL

2) NEW SWP
INSTALLATION

6) MIB
BACK–UP
3) NE SWP LOADING
INTO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
(if necessary)

DURATION:
– 1/2 hour with
interface F
– some minutes with
Ethernet interface

4) AUTOMATIC SW
5) NE CONFIG. DOWNLOAD TO
DATA MNGT SUPERVISOR UNITS
7) MIB (if necessary)
RESTORE
DURATION:
some minutes

Fig. 2. Software management main phases


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 25 / 340

340
The SW management can be distinguished into:

– program management, i.e.:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


• (1) and (2) : SWP loading from CD–ROM to the Personal Computer, after which the PC

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
becomes and can be used as the Equipment Craft Terminal (abbreviated as ECT or CT)

• (3) NE SWP downloading from ECT toward the Network–Element’s Equipment Controller (EC),
if necessary
N.B. in general, first–time system installation is carried out with the NE’s flash card loaded
in factory with the same SWP–version of the ECT, so that this phase is usually not
necessary

• (4) SW downloading from EC toward the Peripheral Units, always automatic (this phase is
carried out only whenever the SW–versions present in the Peripheral Units are lower than those
available in the ECT’s SW components)

– NE configuration data management:

• (5) NE configuration data definition.

• (6) NE configuration data save in Equipment Craft Terminal (MIB back–up)

• (7) NE configuration data restore from Equipment Craft Terminal (MIB restore, if necessary)

The first–time installation can be distinguished in two main procedures:

– SWP installation in PC environment


that includes tasks (1) and (2) mentioned above.
The relevant operating instructions are given in chapter 1–2 on page 31

– SWP download toward NE, if necessary


that includes tasks (3) to (7) mentioned above.
The relevant operating instructions are given in chapter 1–3 on page 67

At the end of the first–time installation, the CT and NE situation is the standard one:

1) Network Element already configured with the more recent SWP version and Craft
Terminal already available.
ECT NE
ECT release = NE release
A.B.c ECT version = NE version A.B.c

This is the typical situation of new installations: the Network Element SW configuration matches
the available Craft Terminal SWP version, so that the NE can be logged–in and the Operator
can carry out the required operations, without any incompatibility problems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 26 / 340

340
1–1.3 How to check ECT and NE versions

[1] How to check ECT version


This check can be done with ECT not connected to any NE
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4) read version


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 3. How to check ECT version

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 27 / 340

340
[2] How to check NE version
Proceed as follows:

1) Carry out NE Login (as described in para.2–1.3.1 on page 92)

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2) From the Menu Bar of the 9400AWY Main view that opens after NE Login (Fig. 37. on page 97),
perform SW Download ⇒ SW Status

version committed
(active)

version stand–by
(not active)

N.B. Usually, when the equipment is shipped from factory, only one SW version (committed) is
present in the flash card.

Fig. 4. How to check NE SW version


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 28 / 340

340
1–1.4 Common situations requiring ECT and/or NE upgrade

The following situations require CT and/or NE upgrading, in order to reach the standard situation defined
in point 1 ) on page 26:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

3) Both Network Element and Craft Terminal already configured with a SWP version older
than that made available by the a new SWP version (SAME RELEASE)

ECT NE
running release = SWP release SWP
CD–ROM
A.B.c = A.B.c running version < SWP version
A.B.d

This could be the typical situation of installations already running with A.B SWP package
(e.g.2.0.0), in the case a newer version of the same A.B SWP package has to be installed
(e.g.2.0.1).

In this case, you must upgrade both ECT and NE as described in Chapter 1–4 on page 79.
After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) on page 26.

4) Network Element already configured with the more recent SWP version, but the Craft
Terminal is not available or has a version older with respect to that of the Network
Element(s).
ECT NE
ECT release = NE release
A.B.c ECT version < NE version A.B.d

In this case, carry out SWP installation in Craft Terminal environment as explained in Chapter
1–2 on page 31. After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) on page 26.

1–1.5 Flash Card related special procedures

Taking into account the information contained in the Flash Card (see para.B.2 on page 302 for
explanations, if necessary), you could need to:

5) for system upgrade purposes, replace the flash card currently in use with a different type
Flash Card (see para.B.2.1 on page 302)
In this case, please refer to Chapter 1–5.2 on page 82.

6) for corrective maintenance purposes, replace the faulty flash card currently in use with a
spare Flash Card
In this case, please refer to Chapter 3–2 Spare Flash Card management and replacement
procedures on page 263
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 29 / 340

340
1–1.6 NE configuration data change and save

It must be emphasized that , every time you change the equipment configuration data (see para.B.2.3 on
page 307), you must always save the relevant data:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
a) data present in Flash Card’s MIB bank [see point b ) on page 308]
data present in Flash Card’s MIB bank can be saved in a MIB back–up file as described in Chapter
2–13 on page 237.
The same paragraph explains how to recover MIB data from the MIB back–up file.

The procedures in this handbook make often reference to the MIB data restore from the MIB back–up
file.
If you change the equipment configuration data without carrying out the MIB back–up save, in case
of troubles you will have to create again the NE configuration data by means of a lot of individual ECT
commands, wasting time and with high probability of errors.

b) data that cannot be saved in the MIB back–up file [see point c ) on page 308]
NE network routing data can be easily saved as print–screens in a MS–Word file as follows:

1) open a new MS–Word document

2) open the screen containing the values of one of the NE network routing data you want to save

3) on the PC keyboard keep key “Alt” pushed and contemporarily push key “Print”, then release
both keys.
With this operation the active screen image is copied to the PC clipboard

4) click in the opened MS–Word document and perform the “paste“


With this operation the screen image is saved from the PC clipboard to the MS–Word document

5) click in the opened MS–Word document, under the image that has been saved, and push key
“return”. You are ready to save another screen image.
Save the MS–Word document, without closing it.

6) repeat steps 2 ) to 5 ) , until you have copied all screens

7) Print the MS–Word document, close and save it where you like.

1–1.7 Craft Terminal related special procedures

If you need to:

8) de–install Alcatel SW from the PC used as Craft terminal, refer to para.1–2.6 on page 65
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 30 / 340

340
1–2 SWP INSTALLATION IN PC ENVIRONMENT

This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the PC environment, or to
upgrade it with a new version of the same SWP, or to de–install the SWP components from the PC.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Before starting the installation procedures, it is suggested to give a look to para.B.1 on page 300
and Chapter 1–1 on page 23.

Procedures described in this chapter are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.

1–2.1 Requirements

1–2.1.1 PC characteristics

For all SWP versions, correct ECT installation requires a PC with the requirements hereafter
described:

1) HW Configuration

– CPU: Pentium III 850 MHz


– RAM: 256 Mbytes (512 Mbytes suggested for Windows XP)
– Hard Disk space: 4 Gbytes
– Display Resolution: 1024x768 pixel
– CD–ROM Drive: 24X
– Primary Interface: Serial Port RS–232–C 9.6 to 57.6 Kbits/sec.
– Optional Interface: Ethernet Card 10/100 Mbits/sec.

2) Windows Versions

– Windows 2000 till SP4


– Windows XP (Professional Edition only) till SP2: It is mandatory de–activate the Firewall
installed.
– Windows NT partially supported: CT–K 3.2 and related Q3/SNMP add–on deliveries can
be run on Windows NT but you have to take in account some restrictions in Almap PC 6.5
and PC 7.0 components. They must be considered as Craft Terminal platform restrictions
in Windows NT environment.

3) Additional requirements

– Netscape Communicator or MS Internet Explorer 4.x or higher.


– Java 2 Run Time Environment versions from 1.3.1–06 to 1.4.1–04

N.B. Each specific Java version could require minimal Windows SP installation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 31 / 340

340
1–2.1.2 Operator skills and privileges

a) The operator shall be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWS–NT / WINDOWS
2000 / WINDOWS XP (Professional Edition only) environment, internally to which the Network

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Element’s application software operates.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
b) Furthermore, for a number of configuration applications, the operator shall be aware of some
specifications of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to the
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) (ITU–T Recommendations).

c) For the installation of SW packages, the Operator’s PC privilege and skill must be those of “System
Administrator”.

d) The Operator shall be familiar with the use of Alcatel 1320CT functionalities. If necessary, a good
approach to the related matters is to read and understand the following sections of the 1320CT Basic
Craft Terminal Rel.3.x Operator’s Handbook (see Tab. 31. on page 329):

• section INTRODUCTION

• section GETTING STARTED

1–2.2 Reference Information Model

For version refer to paragraph on page


V 2.0.0 4–2.2 271
V 2.0.1 4–3.2 275
V 2.0.2 4–4.2 283

1–2.3 Summary of SW installation / de–installation phases

The sequence of installation phases for the SWP loading in PC WINDOWS–NT / XP (Professional Edition
only)/ 2000 environment (PC is disconnected from Equipment Controller) are as follows:

a) Installation from SWP CD–ROM, para.1–2.4 on page 33

1) summary of installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CD–ROM, para.1–2.4.2 on page


33
2) end of SW installation from SWP CD–ROM, para.1–2.4.6 on page 62

b) CT initial configuration, para.1–2.5 on page 63.

Para.1–2.6 on page 65 describes how to to de–install the Software Package from the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 32 / 340

340
1–2.4 SWP loading in PC WINDOWS–NT / 2000 / XP (Professional Edition only)
environment

Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1–2.4.1 Important warnings

Windows versions supported are just those listed in point 2 ) on page 31 (e.g. Windows XP
Home Edition, Windows 95, 98, ME, etc. are not supported).

Warning about Windows XP till SP2 – Professional Edition:


It is mandatory to de–activate the Firewall installed.
Windows NT is partially supported: CT–K 3.2 and related Q3/SNMP add–on deliveries can be
run on Windows NT with some restrictions.

When installing this SWP on a PC where the same CT–K version was installed from a CD–ROM
related to Q3 NE, then it is mandatory to install the CT–K component from this
SWP. To do that you must carry out the CT Products automatic installation described in
para.1–2.4.5 on page 62.

1–2.4.2 Summary of installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CD–ROM

This operation must be performed by the Administrator of the PC, because he could set its IP
address.
Hereafter are described the SWP installation procedures to be used for:
– First installation
The first time this SWP is installed on the PC, follow this procedure:
1) First, install the Java and LLMan components by using the guided installation mode, described
in the para. 1–2.4.3 – CT Products installation guided, on page 34.
2) Second, configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card by using the procedure described in the
para.1–2.4.4 – Alcatel Virtual Network Card configuration, on page 37.
3) At the end, install the other components, by using the automatic installation mode, described
in the para.1–2.4.5 – CT Products automatic installation, on page 62.
– Complete updating
To update one or more components on the PC, follow this procedure:
1) To update the Java and LLMan components use the guided installation mode, described in the
para.1–2.4.3 – CT Products installation guided, on page 34.
2) To update the other components use the automatic installation mode, described in the
para.1–2.4.5 – CT Products automatic installation, on page 62.
– Partial automatic updating
To update one or more components, excluded Java and LLMan, use only the automatic installation
mode, described in the para.1–2.4.5 – CT Products automatic installation, on page 62.

WARNING: During the installation an ALCATEL directory is automatically created, if not already
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

present.
If ALCATEL directory is already present on the PC, for a correct operation of the FTP
server, this directory must have all upper case characters (i.e. “ALCATEL”).

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 33 / 340

340
1–2.4.3 CT Products installation guided

In the following is described (step by step) the procedure to install “JRE” and “Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager” with the “CT Products installation guided”.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Operations sequence:

Step 1. Select the “CT Products installation guided” and press “NEXT” button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 34 / 340

340
Step 2. Select “JRE” (ONLY if you have an OLDER version) and “Alcatel Lower Layer Manager”
components.

WARNING: if try to update JRE and JRE V 1.4.1 is already installed, the procedure automatically
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

de–install, it WITHOUT making the new installation. Keep attention in this case to the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

“Question Window” that appears, which ask you to proceed to the de–installation.

Step 3. Press “NEXT” button to execute the installation of the previously selected components.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 35 / 340

340
Step 4. Press “NEXT” button to start the installation of the Lower Layers Manager.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Step 5. Select “Configure Lower Layer” and press “FINISH” button to complete the operation.

Step 6. Complete the configuration and press OK button.


N.B. If a network adapter is not running in the PC, you can set the “System identifier”field with
a sequence of 12 “0”. The following window will be displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Step 7. Press YES button to confirm.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 36 / 340

340
1–2.4.4 Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

At first SWP installation on ECT, after installation of Alcatel Lower Layer Manager and before the
installation of other ECT SW components, it is necessary, for NE connection using TCP/IP through serial
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

port, to configure a Virtual Network Card.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is a software component used by Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to manage TCP/IP packets through the serial port.

Follow this guide to install and configure Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers using the
Control Panel.

for installation on refer to paragraph on page

Windows NT 4.0 (partially supported) 1–2.4.4.1 38

Windows 2000 till SP2 1–2.4.4.2 44

Windows XP till SP2 (Professional Edition only) 1–2.4.4.3 52


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 37 / 340

340
1–2.4.4.1 Windows NT 4.0

1–2.4.4.1.1 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers select the Adapters tab in the Network Control

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Panel applet.

After installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to configure it following the
instruction of the Windows NT 4.0: Configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers section.

Before installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please
refer to Windows NT Help).
– Click the Add... button in the Adapter tab of the Network Control Panel applet.

Fig. 5. Windows NT installation step 1


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 38 / 340

340
– In the Insert Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase
(e.g. C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type ”echo %systemroot%” from a Command Prompt
window to discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 6. Windows NT installation step 2

– If the dialog box in Fig. 7. appears, the driver is already installed.

Fig. 7. Windows NT installation step 3

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

parameters before use it in with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 39 / 340

340
1–2.4.4.1.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers use both the Bindings and the Protocols
tabs in the Network Control Panel applet.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Before configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol
(please refer to Windows NT Help).

This operation must be performs at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to
set IP address .

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from
the Control Panel.

– Select the bindings of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers in the Bindings tab (1), (2) of
the Network Control Panel applet.

– Disable any unneeded component (3), (4).

– Selecting the Protocols tab (5) of the Network Control Panel applet, the either a message box
(Fig. 9. NT configuration step 2) or a dialog box (Fig. 10. NT configuration step 3) may appear.

– Follow the instructions until the dialog box (Fig. 11. NT configuration step 4) will appear.

5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 8. Windows NT configuration step 1

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 40 / 340

340
– Click Yes to save changes.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 9. Windows NT configuration step 2

– Select Protocols tab (1), TCP/IP Protocol (2) and click the Properties button (3).

Fig. 10. Windows NT configuration step 3


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 41 / 340

340
– Configure the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower
Layers and push OK.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1

Fig. 11. Windows NT configuration step 4

*** WARNING ***

If the IP Address of the Virtual Network Card has been changed after a complete SWP installation, it is
necessary, for a correct ECT functionality, to perform an explicit ECT re–customization by executing the
following command:

– Start → Programs → Alcatel → SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v... → SNMP Add–On Customization


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 42 / 340

340
– Click Close in the Protocols tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 12. Windows NT configuration step 5

– The new configuration of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers will be used at the next restart
of the computer.

– If you are configuring or installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you can click Yes.
If you are installing some other component you should click No and restart the computer later.

Fig. 13. Windows NT configuration step 6

1–2.4.4.1.3 Next step

You have now completed the installation and configuration of the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Layers in Windows NT 4.0 environment. Now proceed with the CT Products automatic installation,
para.1–2.4.5 on page 62.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 43 / 340

340
1–2.4.4.2 Windows 2000

The System Standby function in the Power Option menu of the Control Panel must be always
disabled (select in the Power Schemes tab panel in the Power schemes field “Always On”).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1–2.4.4.2.1 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from
the Control Panel.
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help).
Please make sure of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is not already installed on your PC:
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers has to be installed only once.
After installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to configure it following the
instruction of the Windows 2000: Configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers section.

– Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 14. Windows 2000 installation step 1

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 44 / 340

340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 15. Windows 2000 installation step 2

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
45 / 340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 16. Windows 2000 installation step 3
Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
46 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
– In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation
phase (e.g. C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type ”echo %systemroot%” from a Command
Prompt window to discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 17. Windows 2000 installation step 4


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 47 / 340

340
– Click Next in the Start Hardware Installation dialog box.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 18. Windows 2000 installation step 5


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP
parameters before use it in with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 48 / 340

340
1–2.4.4.2.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

This operation must be performs at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to
set IP address .
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dial–up connections
applet from the Control Panel.

Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help).

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from
the Control Panel.

– Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the
Network and Dial–up connections applet.

Fig. 19. Windows 2000 configuration step 1


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 49 / 340

340
– Uncheck any unneeded component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and select
the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1

Fig. 20. Windows 2000 configuration step 2


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 50 / 340

340
– Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and push OK (3).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1
2

Fig. 21. Windows 2000 configuration step 3

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You need Alcatel Lower Layers Manager
to use it.

*** WARNING ***

If the IP Address of the Virtual Network Card has been changed after a complete SWP installation, it is
necessary, for a correct ECT functionality, to perform an explicit ECT re–customization by executing the
following command:

– Start → Programs → Alcatel → SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v... → SNMP Add–On Customization

1–2.4.4.2.3 Next step

You have now completed the installation and configuration of the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower
Layers in Windows 2000 environment. Now proceed with the CT Products automatic installation,
para.1–2.4.5 on page 62.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 51 / 340

340
1–2.4.4.3 Windows XP (Professional Edition only)

The System Standby function in the Power Option menu of the Control Panel must be always
disabled (select in the Power Schemes tab panel in the Power schemes field “Always On”).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1–2.4.4.3.1 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add Hardware Wizard from the Control
Panel.

After installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to configure it following the
instruction of the Windows XP: Configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers section.

Please make sure of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is not already installed on your PC:
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers has to be installed only once.

– Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 52 / 340

340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 22. Windows XP installation step 1

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
53 / 340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 23. Windows XP installation step 2

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
54 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 24. Windows XP installation step 3
Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
55 / 340
– In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation
phase (e.g. C:\Windows\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type ”echo %systemroot%” from a
Command Prompt window to discover the right location of the Windows folder) and click OK.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
C:\Windows\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC

Fig. 25. Windows XP installation step 4


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 56 / 340

340
– Click Next in the The wizard is ready to install your hardware dialog box.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 26. Windows XP installation step 5


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP
parameters before use it in with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 57 / 340

340
1–2.4.4.3.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers

This operation must be performed by the Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently
could be to set IP address .

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network connections applet from
the Control Panel.

To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from
the Control Panel.

– Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the
Network and Dial–up connections applet.

Fig. 27. Windows XP configuration step 1


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 58 / 340

340
– Uncheck any unneeded component (disable always the QoS Packet Scheduler – 1 –) in the
Properties dialog box General tab. Check and select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2)
and click Properties (3).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1
2

Fig. 28. Windows XP configuration step 2


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 59 / 340

340
– Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and Advanced option (3) and then push OK
(4).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1
2

Fig. 29. Windows XP configuration step 3

*** WARNING ***

If the IP Address of the Virtual Network Card has been changed after a complete SWP installation, it is
necessary, for a correct ECT functionality, to perform an explicit ECT re–customization by executing the
following command:

– Start → Programs → Alcatel → SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v... → SNMP Add–On Customization


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 60 / 340

340
– Configure the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box select the WINS sheet (1), Disable NetBIOS
over TCP/IP (2) and then push OK (3).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 30. Windows XP configuration step 4

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You need Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to use it.

1–2.4.4.3.3 Next step

You have now completed the installation and configuration of the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower
Layers in Windows XP (Professional Edition only) environment. Now proceed with the CT Products
automatic installation, para.1–2.4.5 on page 62.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 61 / 340

340
1–2.4.5 CT Products automatic installation
Hereafter is described the procedure to install all the components except “JRE” and “Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager” with the “CT Products automatic installation”

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Operations sequence:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Step 1. Select the “CT Products automatic installation ” and press “NEXT” button.

Step 2. Select all components except “JRE” and “Alcatel Lower Layer Manager”.

Step 3. Press “NEXT” button to execute the installation of the previously selected components.

1–2.4.6 End of SW installation from SWP CD–ROM

Having reached this phase, you have finished the Software transfer from SWP CD–ROM to the PC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

environment. Now, you can extract the SWP CD–ROM from the PC’s CD–ROM unit.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 62 / 340

340
1–2.5 CT initial configuration

Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1–2.5.1 Craft Terminal configuration

This procedure is necessary to configure the PC in order to manage the Network Elements and includes
the following types of configuration:

– PC hostname

– CT configuration

– Communication Protocol (TCP/IP):

• TCP/IP without a network card

• TCP/IP with a network card

• Switching between the two configurations

– Serial Communication with the NE

– Screen settings

In order to set–up these configurations, refer to:

1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook ,


section “INSTALLATION”, chapter “Craft Terminal Configuration”
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 63 / 340

340
1–2.5.2 Craft Terminal connection to the NE

The CT can be connected to the NE through the Serial Port or through the Ethernet Network Port.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Only one connection can be active. The default connection is the Serial port.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
1–2.5.2.1 Connection through the Serial Port

This connection is the default connection.

To connect the CT to the NE through the Serial Port:

1) The Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Software has to be installed on the PC (refer
to para. 1–2.4.4 on page 37).

N.B. If the IP Address configured for the Alcatel Virtual Card has been changed after the 1320CT
Platform installation, it is necessary to perform a re–customization by entering the following
command:

Start → Programs → Alcatel → SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v.3.1.x → SNMP Add–On Customization

N.B. If the connection through Ethernet Network Port has been activated, to activate again the
connection through the Serial Port enter the following command:

Start → Programs → Alcatel → SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v.3.1.x → NE Connection → Serial Port

1–2.5.2.2 Connection through the Ethernet Network Port

1) Configure the Network Card on the CT as explained in the 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal
Operator’s Handbook.

2) Enter the NE and enable the Ethernet port on the NE (refer to para. 2–2.2.3 on page 113).

3) Quit the NE and close the Network Element Synthesis application.

4) Activate the CT Connection through the Ethernet Port by the following command:

Start→Programs→Alcatel→SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v.3.1.x→NE Connection→Ethernet Port

N.B. If the IP Address configured on the Ethernet port has been changed, it is necessary to perform
a re–customization by entering the following commands:

Start → Programs → Alcatel → CT–K– v.3.1.x → Customization

Start → Programs → Alcatel → SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v.3.1.x → NE Connection→Ethernet Port


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Start → Programs → Alcatel → SNMPCT–K–ADD–ON v.3.1.x → SNMP Add–On Customization

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 64 / 340

340
1–2.6 De–installation phases

This paragraph describes how to de–install from the PC the Software Package required by the Craft
Terminal to manage the relevant Network Element.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This can be useful, for example, when a version of the software package is no more updated.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

To de–install the following procedure can be followed:


– with the CD–ROM containing the relevant Software product.
– with the Control Panel of WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000/XP when the CD–ROM containing the
relevant Software product is not present.
From Control Panel select Add/Remove Programmes and de–install the components shown in the
following figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 31. De–installation

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 65 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
66 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1–3 SWP DOWNLOAD TOWARD NE

This chapter details all phases necessary to download inside the NE equipment environment, and then
activate, a SWP having a version greater than that presently loaded in the NE’s Flash Card.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Before starting the installation procedures, it is suggested to give a look to para.B.1 on page 300
and Chapter 1–1 on page 23.

Procedures described in this chapter are carried out with the PC connected to the NE.

1–3.1 Requirements

1–3.1.1 Craft Terminal

The Craft Terminal, already loaded with the SWP to be downloaded toward the NE (as explained in
previous chapter 1–2 on page 31), must be available together with the cable for its connection to the
equipment F interface.

1–3.1.2 NE state

[1] Equipment state

• equipment must have been previously installed, cabled, powered on and commissioned as
described in para.1–1.1 on page 24

• the SWP–version present inside the NE’s Flash Card must be lower than that of the ECT (refer
to para.1–1.3 on page 27 to know how to compare them).

[2] Equipment HW constraints from V2.0.1


As far as the ETSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (48/60V and 24V power supply) are
concerned:

• the use of the units with the new P/N (3DB xxxxx AB––) is mandatory when the used SWP
version is  2.0.1

• the use of the units with the old P/N (3DB xxxxx AA––) is possible only when the used SWP
version is = 2.0.0

For details, please refer to Chapter IDU PART LIST in Technical Handbook (from Ed.02)

1–3.1.3 Operator skills and profile

a) In addition to skills stated in para.1–2.1.2 on page 32, the Operator must be familiar with all the
equipment functionalities.

b) For SWP version V2.0.2 or later, the Operator’s profile must be “Administrator” or “craftPerson” (see
para.2–2.6 on page 146). Please refer to N.B. on page 70 for additional information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 67 / 340

340
1–3.2 Summary of the SWP installation phases

The installation phases are:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


a) SW download to the NE, para.1–3.3 herebelow

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
b) Activation of the new Software Package on the NE para.1–3.4 on page 76

c) MIB save para.1–3.5 on page 78

1–3.3 SW download to the NE

Following cautions stated in point e ) on page 17, through the suitable cable, connect the ECT to the F
interface of the MAIN unit (see Fig. 180. on page 299).

N.B. The software download can be performed also by using the OS Ethernet interface of the PC.
To activate the Ethernet connection refer to para. 1–2.5.2.2 on page 64. In this case the
download will last only few minutes.

Step 1. Start the ECT

• Start → Alcatel 1320CT

Step 2. Install the current SWP on the platform environment

• On NES (Network Element Synthesis) start “SWP Administrator”: Supervision → Files


Administration (SWP Administrator)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 68 / 340

340
• On SWP Administrator windows press install bottom
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Browse the SWP file descriptor “R94a.dsc” from the disk


(C:\ALCATEL\JUSMw0.1.5\ect\swdw\R94AWY\2.0.x) N.B.

N.B. select the version 2.0.x that must be downloaded


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 69 / 340

340
Step 3. Start Supervision

• On NES (Network Element Synthesis) start “Supervision”: Supervision → Start

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Step 4. Show Equipment

• On NES (Network Element Synthesis) start “Show Equipment”: Supervision → Show


Equipment

N.B. There are two cases:

a) the SWP version present on CT is V2.0.0 or V2.0.1 or V2.0.2 and the SWP version present
on NE is < 2.0.2
In this case the NE is logged in immediately, and the 9400AWY Main view opens (proceed
with next step 5)

b) the SWP version present on CT is  V2.0.3 and the SWP version present on NE is  2.0.2
In this case the Login screen appears (Fig. 35. on page 94), that must be filled in with
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

suitable values; if they are correct, NE is logged in, and the 9400AWY Main view opens
(proceed with next step 5)

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 70 / 340

340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED

Step 5.

03
Setup Server Access Configuration

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
On JUSM start “Server Access Configuration”: SW Download → Server Access Configuration

71 / 340
• In the “FTP Login” window the field “Address” must be set with the same address written in
“Alcatel Lower Layer Manager – IP Network – Local address”. Press “OK” to confirm.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2

N.B. The UserId and Password present in this screen are relevant to the ftp login, are set
automatically with the Use System Default button and have no relationship with those
necessary for the NE login.

Use System Default button

When the operator click the Use System Default button the field ADDRESS can be set in two different
modes:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

1) by F interface: set IP address of the LLMAN to download in interface F mode


2) by LAN interface: set IP address of the PC to download the software in LAN mode

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 72 / 340

340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED


Step 6.

03
Init SW Download

Wait “List Sw Package” creation ...

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
On JUSM start “Init SW Download”: SW Download → Init SW Download

73 / 340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED

03
When action is completed, press “Enter” to close message window.

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
Now select a specific SWP to download on the NE, and press “Init download” to start it.

74 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
• Confirm the start of software downloading:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• The software downloading in progress is shown by a specific window:

• When the download is over the following window is shown:


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 75 / 340

340
1–3.4 Activation of the new Software Package on the NE

• On JUSM start “SW Download”: SW Download → SW Download.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
• After the software download, two software packages are present in the NE: one “Committed”
and the other “Stand by”. The “NE Software Status Detail” window shows the information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 76 / 340

340
• To activate the new software package select the software package in “Stand by Status”.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Now select on “Software Management Action” field “Activation”.

• Press “Apply Action”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 77 / 340

340
• Confirm the selected action.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
• After this window the NE restarts with the new software package.

1–3.5 MIB save

At the end, create a new MIB back–up copy (associated to the new SWP–version), as described in chapter
2–13 on page 237.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 78 / 340

340
1–4 ECT & NE UPGRADE TO A NEW SWP ’VERSION’ (SAME SWP ’RELEASE’)
This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP ’version’ in the PC environment as well
as in the equipment environment.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This procedure can be used only in the case depicted in point 3 ) on page 29, i.e.:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– ECT and equipment are running with one of the Software Packages with P/N indicated in Tab. 15. on
page 270 and with generic version ’A.B.c’ (’A.B’ is the SW release, ’c’ is the patch level)
– a new version of SWP ’A.B.d’ (d > c), having the same P/N, is delivered to Customer.

Procedure:
1) Requirements: see para.1–2.1 on page 31 and para.1–3.1 on page 67.

2) Carry out the installation of the new SWP version in the ECT environment, as indicated in
chapter 1–2 on page 31.
3) The subsequent phases depend on the compatibility of MIB structure between previous and
new SWP versions. This MIB compatibility is indicated in the suitable chapter–paragraph
(according to SWP Version) in Section 4 on page 267. In case you receive a version higher than
the highest listed on page 267, please refer to the documentation accompanying the SWP
delivery to get this information.

N.B. Usually the MIB structure is fully compatible inside a SWP Release, so that the
following step 4 ) must be taken into consideration.

4) new MIB structure compatible with old MIB structure:

a) perform the SW download with the following Craft Terminal commands (refer to
para.2–12.2 on page 234 for detailed description):

• perform step 1 to 5 in para. 1–3.3 on page 68

• SW Download ⇒ Init SW download

• the screen of Fig. 161. on page 234 opens

• select the new NE–version to be downloaded

• with SWP Versions  2.0.1 is necessary to select “Forced” option on CT


screen for SW Download activation request

• click on “Init download” button

• then, after about 1/2 hour, ⇒ SW Download ⇒ SW status ⇒ Apply Action to activate
the software.

N.B. The software download can be performed also by using the Ethernet interface
of the PC. In this case the download lasts only few minutes.

b) perform NE logoff followed by NE login.

The result is the Equipment working with the new SWP version nevertheless maintaining the
old configuration data.

5) new MIB structure not compatible with old MIB structure


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Procedure presently not necessary.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 79 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
80 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1–5 SYSTEM HARDWARE UPGRADE

This chapter details all phases necessary to upgrade 9400AWY system from 1+0 to 1+1 configuration or
install a new Flash Card to improve system capacity.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1–5.1 Upgrade from 1+0 to 1+1 configuration

N.B. This is a summary description. For detailed operative information, please refer to the 9400AWY
Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook and to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Line–Up Guide.
[1] Ascertain to have all materials necessary for the HW upgrade, at IDU and ODU levels as well as
installation materials are concerned
[2] Install the second ODU (for general information, make reference to Fig. 179. on page 292)
[3] Install the CH0 Extension IDU ( b in Fig. 32. below )
[4] Connect the 100–pin cable ( c in Fig. 32. below )
[5] Connect the service cable ( d in Fig. 32. below )
[6] Connect the IDU–ODU cable
[7] Switch on the CH0 Extension IDU
[8] Connect the tributary connection ( e in Fig. 32. below )
[9] Repeat the previous steps in the other station of the link (to reduce the impact on traffic the HW
implementation must be done on the two terminal sides of the link)
[10] When the HW installation is completed and the link is managed by the CT: on the remote link side
in SYSTEM SETTING change the configuration, then repeat the setting in local side.

a a

ËËË ËËË
ËËË ËËË
b b
c
ËËË
ËËË
e d
a
c
ËËË
ËËË
e d
a

from (1+0 & 8 E1/DS1) from (1+0 & 16E1/DS1)


to (1+1 & 8 E1/DS1) to (1+1 & 16 E1/DS1)

a a

ËËË ËËË b

ËËË ËËË
b

ËËË ËËË
c e d c e d
a a

from (1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1)


from (1+0 & E3/DS3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

to (1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1)


to (1+1 & E3/DS3)
Fig. 32. IDU expansion from (1+0) to (1+1)

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 81 / 340

340
1–5.2 Flash Card upgrade

1–5.2.1 Introduction

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Please refer to para.B.2 on page 302 for detailed information on Flash Card position, types, identification
and content.

N.B. To replace a Flash Card with the same type, for maintenance purpose, please refer to
para.3–2.2 – Flash Card replacement procedures on page 264.

In general, the Flash Card upgrade must be done together with HW changes, e.g. changing the
system capacity from “8E1/DS1” to “16E1/DS1” requires to:

– change the existing SW Key “8E1/DS1” to “16E1/DS1”; this chapter explains how to do
this operation

– and install (if not yet present) the 9–16 E1/DS1 PLUG–IN in the IDU MAIN UNIT, as well
in the IDU EXTENSION UNIT in case of 1+1 systems; to carry out this operation, please
refer to the TECHNICAL HANDBOOK, chapter IDU OPERATIVE INFORMATION,
paragraph Installation of tributary plug–ins.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 82 / 340

340
1–5.2.2 Summary procedure for both stations

This example is for changing existing SW Key “8E1/DS1” to “16E1/DS1”. Adapt it to the actual change you
must do.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Tab. 2. Flash card upgrade carried out by one operator only for both stations
STEP 2 IN STATION A
STEP 1 IN STATION B notes
(in series to step1)
Current configuration Back–up idem
Flash card replacement (from SW Key
“8E1/DS1” to “16E1/DS1”). This requires,
in typical condition (rack installation), to
switch the IDU off and disconnect cables;
idem
otherwise, if the installation condition
allows to replace the flash card without
disconnecting cables, the NE supports an
hot replacement
IDU switch–on (after re–cabling) or NE
Restart (in case of hot replacement), Start
idem
Supervision & Open USM (empty due to
the non–preconfigured flash card)
Check that the SW Key is the new one idem
MIB Restore / Activation, Start Supervision
idem
& Open USM
Quick configuration. In this case
(=dialogue with ODU already established),
the shifter and TX frequency are allowed to
be set also by Quick config. The NE type idem
is modified to 16E1 and the Tributary
config is set again to 8E1 (not to 16E1
as desired)
Re–opening USM
Go to STATION A and carry out operations
detailed in column STEP 2
Open Local and Remote USM
CHANGE REMOTE CONFIG BY
SYSTEM SETTING FROM 8E1 TO 16E1
CAPACITY the traffic is
impacted for
CHANGE LOCAL CONFIG BY SYSTEM about 1 min
SETTING FROM 8E1 TO 16E1
CAPACITY

Following paragraphs are given just for Operators who need to know what to do in detail:
– Ordering the new Flash Card
– Installation of a new Flash Card fully configured in factory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– Installation of a new Flash Card not configured in factory

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 83 / 340

340
1–5.2.3 Ordering the new Flash Card

Whenever the Base configuration of the 9400AWY NE must be upgraded, Customer must order a new
Flash Card:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
– of the type consistent with the equipment configuration he wants (see Tab. 22. on page 302),

– and, already set by Alcatel Factory:

• with the same SWP–version (or higher) present in the 9400AWY system to be upgraded,
already present in the Flash–Card’s SW COMMIT VERSION bank

• with the same NE network routing data of the system to be upgraded [such data could be
provided as specified in point b ) on page 30]

– and preferably, already set by Alcatel Factory:

• with the same MIB of the system to be upgraded (for this purpose, Customer can save the MIB
on floppy–disk as explained in chapter 2–13 on page 237 and give it to Alcatel Factory).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 84 / 340

340
1–5.2.4 Installation of a new Flash Card fully configured in factory

General warnings:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Screw fixing
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m)  10 %


2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb)  10 %
This procedure can be carried out only if the new Flash Card is delivered with SW and data as
specified in para.1–5.2.3 on page 84.

Procedure:
After having got the new Flash Card, the phases for the Flash Card upgrading are:
[1] get the new Flash Card; leave it in its protective envelope until you have worn the antistatic protection
armlet
[2] if not connected, connect the Craft Terminal, switch it on, start 1320CT and login the NE (details in
para.2–1.3.1 on page 92)
[3] by Craft Terminal, save the MIB data [as shown in MIB BackUp in Fig. 164. on page 237 (from
operative point of view, refer to para.2–7.3.1 on page 192)]
[4] wear the antistatic protection armlet (see point b ) on page 17) and connect its termination to a
grounded structure
ATTENTION

(caution to avoid equipment damage)


this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
[5] remove the Flash Card cover (see Fig. 181. on page 299). Store tidily cover and screws for their
successive mount
[6] extract the old Flash Card from the IDU Main Unit and insert the new one (refer to Fig. 182. on page
299 for Flash Card profile and insertion direction)
[7] carry out MIB data restore and SW activation [(using MIB saved in step [3] above) as shown in MIB
Restore in Fig. 164. on page 237 (from operative point of view, refer to para.2–7.3.2 and 2–7.3.3
on page 193)]. In alternative to activation by SW, carry out the Equipment Controller HW Reset,
pushing the suitable button on IDU MAIN Unit (see Fig. 180. on page 299).
About two minutes are necessary for the supervision process to get data from the new flash card.
[8] restore the Flash Card cover removed in step [5] above (screw tightening torque as in point c ) on
page 17)
[9] now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet
[10] carry out Quick Configuration procedure by Craft Terminal (details in para.2–2.5 on page 131), to
change the system capacity

[11] carry out functional checks on the radio link by Craft Terminal
[12] as the new Flash Card is supplied with a self–adhesive label containing the Flash Card Name, get
and stick it over the older one (see Fig. 180. on page 299); (N.B. if possible, remove the older
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

self–adhesive label before sticking the newer).

End of procedure

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 85 / 340

340
1–5.2.5 Installation of a new Flash Card not configured in factory

General warnings:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Screw fixing

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m)  10 %


2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb)  10 %
With this procedure, the system is isolated from the supervision network.
In fact, the insertion in a 9400AWY system connected to the network of a Flash Card with:
– “default” or “unknown“ NE network routing data
– SW Commit Version “unknown“ or lower than that present on the system
must be absolutely avoided.

Procedure:

After having got the new Flash Card, the phases for the Flash Card upgrading are:

[1] get the new Flash Card; leave it in its protective envelope until you have worn the antistatic protection
armlet

[2] if not connected, connect the Craft Terminal, switch it on, start 1320CT and login the NE (details in
para.2–1.3.1 on page 92)

[3] by Craft Terminal, take notice of the NE network routing data currently set [suggested procedure
specified in point b ) on page 30]

[4] by Craft Terminal, save the MIB data as shown in MIB BackUp in Fig. 164. on page 237 (from
operative point of view, refer to para.2–7.3.1 on page 192)

[5] isolate the NE from the supervision network


N.B. Before to isolate the system from the supervision network, inform the supervision center:
if (from the supervision point of view), there are other NEs cascade–connected to it (and
without supervision ring network) they will be isolated, too.

[6] wear the antistatic protection armlet (see point b ) on page 17) and connect its termination to a
grounded structure
ATTENTION

(caution to avoid equipment damage)


this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges

[7] remove the Flash Card cover (see Fig. 181. on page 299). Store tidily cover and screws for their
successive mount

[8] extract the old Flash Card from the IDU Main Unit and insert the new one. Refer to Fig. 182. on page
299 for Flash Card profile and insertion direction

[9] restore the Flash Card cover removed in step [7] above (screw tightening torque as in point c ) on
page 17)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

[10] now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 86 / 340

340
[11] now you must perform all operations regarding the NE SW download and data definition, as it is was
done at the equipment SW first time installation:

• SWP download from C.T. to NE, using the same SWP–version


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

• NE network routing data definition (using data annotated in step [3] above)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• MIB data restore and activation (using MIB saved in step [4] above) as shown in MIB Restore
in Fig. 164. on page 237 (from operative point of view, refer to para.2–7.3.2 and 2–7.3.3 on
page 193). In alternative to activation by SW, carry out the Equipment Controller HW Reset,
pushing the suitable button on IDU MAIN Unit (see Fig. 180. on page 299).
About two minutes are necessary for the supervision process to get data from the new flash
card.

[12] carry out Quick Configuration procedure by Craft Terminal (details in para.2–2.5 on page 131), to
change the system capacity

[13] connect the system to the supervision network

[14] carry out functional checks on the radio link by Craft Terminal

[15] as the new Flash Card is supplied with a self–adhesive label containing the Flash Card Name, get
and stick it over the older one (see Fig. 180. on page 299); (N.B. if possible, remove the older
self–adhesive label before sticking the newer).

In alternative, if an off–line IDU MAIN unit is available at Customer premises, the Flash Card
can be prepared on it, and then installed on the target system as described in previous
para.1–5.2.4 on page 85.

End of procedure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 87 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
88 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT

SECTION CONTENT PAGE


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Chapter 2–1 – General introduction on views and menus


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This chapter describes the organization of the 9400AWY ULS N.E., presented after 91
the NE login.
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
Chapter 2–2 – Configuration
107
This chapter describes the configuration relevant to the equipment management.
Chapter 2–3 – Equipment
This chapter deals with the presentation of the N.E. and the structure of the
151
hierarchical tree, and the types of subracks and boards, that comprise the Network
Element.
Chapter 2–4 – Line Interface
This chapter describes the operations necessary for the configuration setting and 161
verification of each tributary.
Chapter 2–5 – Radio
171
This chapter deals with the management of the Radio transmission features.
Chapter 2–6 – External input and output points
This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental 185
alarms (housekeeping alarms).
FUNCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE
Chapter 2–7 – Supervision
This chapter describes how to manage the NE access from OS or local ECT and 189
how to restart the NE.
Chapter 2–8 – Protection schemes
195
This chapter deals with the management of the Radio protections.
Chapter 2–9 – Loopbacks
This chapter describes the commands for loopback management, for 207
commissioning or maintenance purposes.
Chapter 2–10 – Diagnosis
This chapter describes how to access the Alarm and Event Log files and explains
the Summary Block Diagram View menu. 217
N.B. The chapter does not describe the Log Browser. Reference must be
done to the specific “ELB Operator’s Handbook”.
Chapter 2–11 – Performance Monitoring
223
This chapter deals with the use of the Performance Monitoring functionalities.
SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
Chapter 2–12 – Software Management
This chapter deals with the management of the functions related to the software 233
verification/download.
Chapter 2–13 – MIB Management
This chapter deals with the management of the functions related to the back–up 237
and restore of equipment configuration data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 89 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
90 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS

This chapter describes the organization of the 9400AWY N.E., presented after the NE login.
First the view organization is introduced, then the accessible menu options are listed.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Some further advices are given for Navigation principles.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2–1.1 Requirements

a) Craft Terminal

• the Craft Terminal, loaded with the SWP relevant to this NE, must be available together with the
cable for its connection to the equipment F interface.

• the Craft Terminal SWP–version must match that loaded in this NE. Solve different situations,
if any, according to instructions given in para.1–1.4 on page 29.

• this NE must have been already configured in the used Craft Terminal.

b) Operator profiles and allowed operations

Starting with SWP–version V2.0.2, the menu options described in this section are all
available logging in the system with the Administrator profile username and password.
Logging the system with other operator profiles result in some functionality access
limitations. For further information please refer to Profiles management , para.2–2.6 on
page 146.

c) Operator skills

• the Operator shall be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWS–NT /
WINDOWS–2000 / WINDOWS–XP (professional version only) environment, internally to
which the Network Element’s application software operates.

• the Operator must be familiar with all the functionalities of this equipment.

• furthermore, for a number of configuration applications, the operator shall be aware of some
specifications of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to
the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) (CCITT Recommendations).

d) Documentation

Besides this handbook, all the documentation set this manual belongs to must be available to the
Operator, to retrieve pieces of information not contained in this handbook. The documentation set
is described in Appendix D on page 321.

2–1.2 NE management states

The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are called Network Elements (NEs).
When operating with a Craft Terminal, the NE can present different management states according to the
condition of the connection (supervision, local access, connection state, etc.). Also general Alarm states
are presented.
Management states are present at the Network Element Synthesis view level and at the ULS view level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

All information relevant to the management states are included in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s
Handbook.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 91 / 340

340
2–1.3 NE supervision, login, logoff and switch off

The Network Element Synthesis views enable to get access to the views described in this handbook.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


– NE supervision and login

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
The Network Element Synthesis view enables to work on local or remote NE ULS, selecting them
and activating Supervision and Login, as described in para.2–1.3.1 below.

– NE logoff and switch off


In order to logoff the NE, or before disconnecting the F interface cable, or before switching off the
NE, close the NE JUSM window and stop the NE supervision as described in para.2–1.3.2 on page
95.

2–1.3.1 NE Login

a) Cable connection (if not yet done)

Following cautions stated in point e ) on page 17, through the suitable cable connect the ECT to the
F interface or to the OS Ethernet interface of the MAIN unit (refer to Fig. 180. on page 299).

To activate on the CT the connection through the Serial Port or through the Ethernet Port refer to
para. 1–2.5.2 on page 64.

b) Craft Terminal (CT) start–up

1) CT start :

– power on the CT and wait for PC start–up

– Start ⇒ Alcatel 1320CT:

• if choice Alcatel 1320CT is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal:


Software Package loading is necessary

after a while, the “Network Element Synthesis” screen will appear (Fig. 33. below),
showing all Network Elements that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs
appear with symbol “?” (it means they are not supervised)

Note: the symbol indicates the NE to which CT is locally connected by cable

Fig. 33. Network Element Synthesis Window

N.B. For a corrected operation, only on some PC with Windows 2000 or XP by using the
serial connection, it is necessary to start the Lower Layers Manager (Start →
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Programs → Alcatel → Lower Layers → Lower Layers Manager) before starting the
ECT Platform (Alcatel 1320CT).

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 92 / 340

340
c) Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE)

From screen “Network Element Synthesis” (Fig. 33. above) :


1) select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it;
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

N.B. During the creation of the SNMP NE (refer to the 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal
Operator’s Handbook, section 5 “EML CONSTRUCTION”), in the TCP/IP Port field
number “161” must be inserted.

2) while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision and with left mouse
button execute it (click once). In alternative, while NE selected, with left mouse button choose
Supervision ⇒ Start
Wait until the symbol “?” becomes at first (under exploration) and then colored “•” (it
means “NE in supervised state”), as shown in Fig. 34. below

N.B. In order to know the possible “color” meaning , refer to the:


• 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Rel.3.x Operator’s Handbook (see Tab. 31. on page
329)
– chapter “SOFTWARE INSTALLATION”
• paragraph “Craft Terminal Configuration”,
• sub–paragraph “Communication with NE”

Fig. 34. NE in supervised state

N.B. The User Label of the NE must not include the following characters:
\ ? : * “ < >|.

WARNING: Due to a deep fading, the radio remote NE can be unreachable. In this condition in the
USM will appear the following message:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 93 / 340

340
In this case, operate as follows:
• The JUSM must be closed.
In the NES will appear a broken icon and a red bullet.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


• Wait for the automatic restarting of the Supervision (at the end of the fading conditions).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
The icon in NES will become whole and the bullet will take the color relevant to the alarms (if
any) active in the NE.

• If the Supervision does not start, close and open again the CT.

• If the Supervision does not start, switch off and switch on the PC.

WARNING: When the supervision of a NE has been started don’t click on the name of the map.
This operation causes the lock of the CT and the CT must be closed and opened again.

d) Network Element login

From screen “Network Element Synthesis” with NE in supervised state (Fig. 34. on page 93):

1) select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once right mouse button on it;

2) select Show Equipment. There are two cases:

a) the SWP version (present both on CT and NE) is V2.0.0 or V2.0.1


In this case the NE is logged in, and the 9400AWY Main view opens (Fig. 37. on page 97)

b) the SWP version (present both on CT and NE) is  V2.0.2


In this case the Login screen appears (Fig. 35. below), that must be filled in with suitable
values.

Fig. 35. Login screen

At first installation time, one default Administrator user is available only, with (lower case):
• UserName= initial
• Password = initialing
Otherwise, use the Login information the Administrator has assigned you.

If the Login values are correct, the 9400AWY Main view opens (Fig. 37. on page 97)

After the 9400AWY Main view has opened, all the available menus are explained in Section 2 NE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

MANAGEMENT on page 89.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 94 / 340

340
2–1.3.2 NE Logoff or switch off

Before disconnecting the F interface cable or before switching off the NE:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

– close the NE JUSM window clicking


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– then, in the Network Element Synthesis Window (Fig. 36. below), stop the NE supervision
as follows:
• select NE with mouse left button
• holding it selected, select Stop supervision with mouse right button. In alternative,
while NE selected, with left mouse button choose Supervision ⇒ Stop

Fig. 36. NE Stop Supervision

• NE will go to not supervised state, with symbol “?” as shown in Fig. 33. on page 92.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 95 / 340

340
2–1.4 9400AWY view organization

The 9400AWY view ( see Fig. 37. on page 97 ) contains the following fields, which provide the operator
with the information needed to manage the NE:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
• Severity alarm synthesis,

• Domain alarm synthesis,

• Management status control panel,

• View title,

• View area,

• Message/state area.

The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permit to perform all configuration and
supervision operations and the display the specific selected item.

The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the
description.

N.B. Fig. 37. on page 97 shows the 9400AWY in 1+1 configuration.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 96 / 340

340
Severity alarm Domain alarm
synthesis synthesis
Menu
bar
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Main tool
bar

View
area

Management
state control panel

Fig. 37. 9400AWY Main view organization

N.B. For the meaning of the icons in the Severity alarm synthesis, Domain alarm synthesis and the
Management state control panel refer to Alarm synthesis indication para.3–1.4.1 on page
250.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 97 / 340

340
2–1.4.1 View Area

The View Area manages all domains from which the user can start. It is organized into tabbed panel, e.g.
many windows placed one upon another. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


a tab shown on the top.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Each panel represents a set of functions. The area consist of the following sets:

– Equipment

– External Points

– Line Interface

– Performance

– Radio

– Protection Schemes (in 1+1 configuration only)

– Loopback

– Sw Download

The following figure shows the tabbed panel organization.

Each tab panel is labeled with the set name ( e.g. Equipment, Line Interface, etc ).

RESOURCE
TREE AREA
RESOURCE LIST AREA

RESOURCE DETAIL AREA

Fig. 38. View Areas


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 98 / 340

340
Each tab–panel (e.g. functionalities area) consists of four areas:

– Resource–Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the Radio NE.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

– Resource–List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View (e.g., Line Interface Domain) or
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Graphical View (e.g., Equipment Domain).

• Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular
element is shown.

• Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. As default, no


tabular element is shown.

– Resource–Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area.
As a default, no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource
List area.

2–1.4.2 Resource Tree Area

The “Resource Area” displays all the available resources in a tree structure like the protocol stack
hierarchy. The below figure shows an example of the resource tree instance (for the Line Interface
functions):

Fig. 39. Resource tree area

2–1.4.2.1 Selection Criteria

Each tree node consists of two symbols. The first symbol indicates the state of the structure e.g., if the
symbol is ”+” the tree can be expanded to a lower level. The tree structure can be collapsed if the symbol
is “–“. Finally, if there is no symbol, the node represents a leaf. The second symbol is the graphical
representation of the resource.
The user must select the resource by clicking with the mouse to carry out an action that depends on the
type of click.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Each resource listed above may be selected by using the mouse by a:

– Single left click;


– Double left click

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 99 / 340

340
Single left click:
By a single left click the resource is highlighted. This selection causes the activation of the
resource list area, e.g., every time the user selects a resource in the resource tree area the
corresponding Tabular or Graphical representation is displayed in the ”Resource list area” .

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Double left click:
Using this type of selection on the items of the resource tree, the user can expand the tree
structure and activate the “Resource list area” displaying the same information described
above. When the tree node is expanded a double click will collapse the tree node showing the
same information in the “Resource list area”.

2–1.4.3 Resource Detail Area

This area displays the detailed information of the selected object in the Resource list area. It also provides
the types of operations available

2–1.4.4 Button Policy

The possible buttons for selection are the following:

– Apply this button activates the “modify”, but it does not close the window.

– Cancel this button closes the window without modifying the parameters displayed in the window.

– OK this button activates the modify and closes the window

– Close this button closes the window

– Help this button provides the help management for the functions of the supporting window.

Critical configuration choices generate a warning message for user confirmation before to be activated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 100 / 340

340
2–1.5 Introduction to the menu options
The menu bar allows to perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element.
This paragraph lists all menu options and then provides more details on the respective contained entries.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs
where they are detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this
chapter.
From Chapter 2–2 on page 107 details and operating information on all views are given.
In the menu bar, a number of permanent menu items are always displayed. Starting from the left, the
menus are:

– Permanent Menus

• Views (first column). See para.2–1.5.1 on page 102.

To navigate among the views and to set the TMN parameters.

• Configuration (second column). See para.2–1.5.2 on page 104.

To set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters
(performance monitoring, OverHead parameters).

• Diagnosis (third column). See para.2–1.5.3 on page 104.

To get information on the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory).

• Supervision (fourth column). See para.2–1.5.4 on page 105.

To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling).

• SW Download (fifth column). See para. 2–1.5.5 on page 105.

To manage the NE software (download, MIB management).

• Help (last column).

To activate the help on line.

The menu bar also comprises other menus, presented only when a specific option is selected.

– Other Menus

• Equipment

This menu is present only when the Equipment menu (selected in the View menu or in the
Equipment tab panel) is active. It allows to go back to the supporting equipment of the displayed
object.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 101 / 340

340
2–1.5.1 Views menu introduction

The menu on the left side of the screen, allows to navigate among the views and to set some parameters,
by means of the following entries:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
– Previous: Goes back to the previous screen of the application.

– Open Object: Not active.

– Open in New
Window: Not active.

– Duplicate View in
New Window: Not active.

– Equipment: Opens the Equipment view.


Then the “Equipment” menu is available on the menu bar.
See Chapter 2–3 on page 151.

– External Points: Displays and sets the input/output environmental alarm.


See Chapter 2–6 on page 185.

– Line Interface: Opens the Line Interface view to configure all the tributary ports.
See Chapter 2–4 on page 161.

– Performance: Allows to manage the Performance monitoring.


See Chapter 2–11 on page 223.

– Radio: Allows to manage all the functions relevant to the radio channels.
See Chapter 2–5 on page 171.

– Protection Scheme: Allows to manage the Protection schemes in 1+1 configuration.


See Chapter 2–8 on page 195.

– Loopback: Allows to manage the loopbacks available with the equipment.


See Chapter 2–9 on page 207.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 102 / 340

340
N.B. It is possible to enter directly menus Equipment, External Points, Line Interface, Performance,
Radio, Protection Scheme, Loopback by clicking on the relevant tab panel above the view area.
Refer to Fig. 40. on page 103.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Tab panel

Fig. 40. Tab panels


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 103 / 340

340
2–1.5.2 Configuration menu introduction

This menu allows to set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by
means of the following entries:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
– NE Time: Displays and set the NE local time. See para. 2–2.1 on page 108.

– Network configuration: See para. 2–2.2 on page 109.

– Alarm Severities: Manages the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile.


See para. 2–2.3 on page 122.

– System setting: Allows the system configuration, providing the setting of all the parameters
for the NE setup. See para. 2–2.4 on page 127.

– Quick configuration: Allows a full system configuration through a guided procedure.


See para. 2–2.5 on page 131.

– Profiles management: Allows the CT user profile management.


N.B. this feature is available starting with SWP version V2.0.2.
See para. 2–2.6 on page 146.

2–1.5.3 Diagnosis menu introduction

This menu allows to get information on the NE, by means of the following entries:

– Log Browsing: Manages the events stored in the NE.


Opens the following menu options:
• Alarm log
• Event log
• Software Trace log
See para. 2–10.1 on page 217.

– Current configuration
View: Displays the current configuration of the NE.
See para. 2–10.2 on page 217.

– Summary Block
Diagram View: Displays a global logical view (strictly related to the physical implementation)
highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in the system
(ODU+IDU).
See para. 2–10.4 on page 218.

– Abnormal
condition list: Displays the manually operations active in the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 104 / 340

340
2–1.5.4 Supervision menu introduction

This menu allows to set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries (see chapter
2–7 on page 189) :
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Access State: Manages the supervision access to the NE, via CT or OS.
Opens the following menu options:
• OS
• Requested
See para. 2–7.1 on page 189.

– Restart NE: Reset of the NE software.


See para. 2–7.2 on page 190.

– MIB Management: Allows to perform backup and restore operations of the MIB.
See para. 2–7.3 on page 191.

– SW key: Displays the type of the key stored in the flash card.
See para. 2–7.4 on page 194.

2–1.5.5 Download menu introduction

This menu allows to manage the NE software, by means of the following entries (see chapter 2–12 on page
233) :

– Server Access
Configuration: Manages the configuration of the FTP server to be used for the software
download to the NE.
See para. 2–12.1 on page 233.

– Init SW download: Manages the software download to the NE.


See para. 2–12.2 on page 234.

– SW status: Shows and manages the status of the software packages installed in the NE
memory banks.
See para. 2–12.3 on page 235.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 105 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
106 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–2 CONFIGURATION

This chapter describes the following Configuration menus:


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

– NE Time on page 108


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Network Configuration on page 109

• Local Configuration on page 110

• NTP Configuration on page 111

• Ethernet Configuration on page 113

• IP Configuration on page 114

– IP static routing configuration on page 114

– OSPF Area configuration on page 118

– IP Address configuration of Point–To–Point Interfaces on page 120

• Routing information on page 121

– Alarm Severities on page 122

– System Settings on page 127

• NE Configuration on page 127

• Overhead on page 130

– Quick Configuration Procedure on page 131

– Profiles management on page 146

• Functional description on page 146

• Change Password procedure on page 148

• Users Management procedure on page 149


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 107 / 340

340
2–2.1 NE Time

The NE local time can be displayed and/or re–aligned to the OS time basis.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
The following dialogue box opens, from which you can set the local NE time.

Fig. 41. NE Time dialogue box

The NE Time dialogue box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.

To re–align the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the
Apply pushbutton to validate.

The NTP status field is a read–only screen, which shows the configuration regarding the Network Time
Protocol performed in the menu Configuration –> Network Configuration –> NTP Configuration.

The Refresh pushbutton causes the refresh of the screen.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 108 / 340

340
2–2.2 Network Configuration

To get access the Network Configuration option select the Configuration pull down menu, as shown
in the following figure.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 42. Network Configuration menu

The Network Configuration allows to perform the following operations:

Local Configuration: defines the local NE addresses

NTP Configuration: allows to enable/disable the Network Time Protocol

Ethernet Configuration: defines the configuration parameters necessary to manage


the local NE providing a LAN Ethernet interface

IP Configuration which comprises:

IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static
routing

OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First address

IP Address configuration of
Point–To–Point Interfaces : defines the IP address of the interface which use the PPP
protocol

Routing information shows a summary of the information relevant to the routing


which has been configured.

The options are described in next paragraphs.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 109 / 340

340
2–2.2.1 Local Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the Local Configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
option.

The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 43. on page 110 ) which allows to configure the local IP address of the
NE.

This local IP address is the IP address associated to the F interface and to the other interfaces which use
the PPP protocol (the 3 NMS channels).

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and
closes it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

Close button closes the dialogue.

Help button provides some useful information on the dialogue.

Fig. 43. Local Configuration dialogue box


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 110 / 340

340
2–2.2.2 NTP Configuration

By selecting NTP Configuration the dialog–box in Fig. 44. opens, which allows to enable the Network
Time Protocol.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 44. NTP Configuration dialogue box

To enable the NTP put a tick in the check box of the Enabling NTP protocol field.

If the NTP has been enabled in the Main Server address field write the IP address of the Server, which
distributes the NTP and in the Spare Server address field write the IP address of the Spare Server, if any,
which will distribute the NTP in case of failure in the Main Server.

To configure the setting click on Apply.

The Refresh pushbutton causes the refresh of the screen.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 111 / 340

340
2–2.2.2.1 How to configure the NTP in a network

When the NTP is enabled, one of the NE must be MASTER and all the other NEs must be SLAVEs.
An example is shown in Fig. 45.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4

Fig. 45. Map

As example NE1 must be set as Master:

– enable the NTP protocol;


– in the Main Server address field and in the Spare Server address field write nothing (in this way
the NE is defined as Master).

NE2 is set as Slave:

– enable the NTP protocol;


– in the Main Server address field enter the IP address of NE1 (the Master NE);
– in the Spare Server address field enter the IP address of NE1.

NE3 is set as Slave:

– enable the NTP protocol;


– in the Main Server address field enter the IP address of NE1 (the Master NE);
– in the Spare Server address field enter the IP address of NE2.

NE4 is set as Slave:

– enable the NTP protocol;


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– in the Main Server address field enter the IP address of NE1 (the Master NE);
– in the Spare Server address field enter the IP address of NE2.

All the other NEs must be set as NE4.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 112 / 340

340
2–2.2.3 Ethernet Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the Ethernet
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Configuration option.

The dialogue box in Fig. 46. on page 113 opens, which allows to define the parameters necessary to
configure the Ethernet interface.

The following areas are present:

– IP Section which comprises:

• IP Address to be assigned to the N.E.


• IP Mask relevant to the IP address
• IP Routing Protocol can be only in “ None” state. If “OSPF” or “ Both“ options of Routing IP
Protocol field are selected, also the “ Associated OSPF Area “ must be set.
• OSPF Area pointer: if as IP Routing Protocol the OSPF protocol has been selected it is possible
to create OSPF areas.

– Enable which comprises two selections to Enable or Disable the Ethernet interface.

Refresh button refresh the information written in the upper port.


Apply button performs a configuration change of the data.
Close button closes the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 46. Ethernet Configuration dialogue box

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 113 / 340

340
2–2.2.4 IP Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Network Configuration and then from the
cascading menu, the IP Configuration option ( see Fig. 47. on page 114).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 47. IP configuration screen

2–2.2.4.1 IP static routing configuration

The dialog–box opens ( see Fig. 48. on page 115 ) and allows to configure the parameters for IP Static
Routing Configuration.

The following fields and data are present:

[1] IP Address: allows to define the IP address necessary to reach a


specific Host

[2] IP Mask: allows to define the IP Mask to reach a network

[3] Default Gateway IP Address: allows to define the address of the next hop gateway

[4] Interface type: allows to use point to point interfaces made available
by the NE.

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and
close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

New button is used to insert a new page.

Delete button is used to delete the selected page.

Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 114 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 48. IP static routing configuration screen

By pressing Create pushbutton the screen in Fig. 49. on page 116 opens.

In the Host or Network Address Choice field select:

– Host to address to a single IP address;

– Network to address to a range of IP addresses.

In the Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice select:

– Default Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet interface;

– Point to Point Interface Index for the NMS channels (NMS–RF, NMS–V11, NMS–G703)

WARNING: No pending (open) static routes are allowed.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The default software uses first the static routes and then the dynamic routes. An open
static route is always considered as a preferential path.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 115 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 49. Create Static routing

If in the screen of Fig. 49. on page 116 the Default Gateway IP Address check box has been selected,
write in the Default Gateway IP Address field below the relevant IP address.

If in screen in Fig. 49. on page 116 has been selected the Point To Point Interface Index check box,
the screen in Fig. 50. on page 117 opens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 116 / 340

340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 50. Point To Point Interface Choice

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
In this screen one of the 3 NMS channels (NMS–RF, NMS–V11, NMS–G703) can be selected.

117 / 340
2–2.2.4.2 OSPF Area configuration

The dialog–box opens ( see Fig. 51. on page 118 ) and allows to configure the parameters for OSPF
(Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The following fields and data are present:

– OSPF Area IP Address

– OSPF Area Stub

The fields give a synthetical information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network)
in an Area.

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table
and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

New button is used to insert a new page.

Delete button is used to delete the selected page.

Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

Fig. 51. OSPF Area configuration screen

WARNING: Area 0 is managed and created by default with Id = 0 and IP address = 0.0.0.0

WARNING: If the area is a Stub area the functionalities of the Remote Craft Terminal are not fully
guaranteed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

WARNING: When the area is a Stub area, all interfaces inside the same Stub Area (NMS and
Ethernet) must be defined “Stub”.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 118 / 340

340
By pressing Create pushbutton the screen in Fig. 52. below opens.

N.B. 3 areas max. can be created.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 52. Create New OSPF Area

In the screen write the IP address, the IP mask and select the flag (True/False).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 119 / 340

340
2–2.2.4.3 IP Address configuration of Point–To–Point Interfaces

The dialog–box opens ( see Fig. 53. on page 120 ) and allows to Enable or Disable the three NMS
channels, which use the PPP protocol.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog–box and closes
it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.

Fig. 53. IP Address configuration of Point–To–Point Interfaces screen


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 120 / 340

340
2–2.2.5 Routing information

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Network Configuration and then from the
cascading menu, the Routing information option.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The dialog–box in Fig. 54. on page 121 opens.

Fig. 54. Routing information screen

This screen is a read–only screen and displays the routing parameters currently active on the NE.

The pushbutton Refresh allows to refresh the information shown in the screen.

The Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 121 / 340

340
2–2.3 Alarm Severities

By selecting the Alarm Severities option from the Configuration menu the screen in Fig. 55. on page
123 appears.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
In this screen in the Profile Name field are listed the 4 default Alarm Severity Profiles:

– Profile “No Alarms”. With this profile all alarms are disabled.

– Profile “Primary Alarms”. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms. General rules
used to define the alarms severity:

• MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);

• MINOR or WARNING (according to the impact of the alarm): the alarm doesn’t affects the
service (with the exception of HighBER alarm, which MINOR alarm severity is defined, even if
it is service affecting).

– Profile “No Remote Alarms”. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms plus EW and
LBER alarm. This profile uses the following rules to define the alarms severity:

• MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);

• MINOR: the alarm is potentially service affecting but a protection has recovered the service;

• WARNING: the alarm cannot affect the service (independently from any protection).

– Profile “All Alarms”. This profile enables the emission of all the alarms (included AIS and RDI). This
profile uses the same severity of the “Primary alarm” profile, the only difference is that EW, LBER,
AIS and RDI alarms are emitted.
The rules used to define the alarm severity are the same of the “Primary alarm” profile.

N.B. In case of alarms affecting a protection different severities are used for SA and NSA. The same
severity is used both for SA and NSA in case of service independent alarms.

N.B. The rules used to define the profile alarms severity described above, are not applied to the
housekeeping alarms. In this case, in order to enhance the flexibility, a different severity is
assigned to each alarm profile (WAR, MIN and MAJ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 122 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 55. Alarm Severities Profile

In the screen of Fig. 55. on page 123 are available 2 buttons:

– Close: to close the screen.


– Clone: to create a new Alarm Severity Profile. To create a clone refer to para. 2–2.3.1 on page 124.

N.B. Only 2 new profiles can be created.

An Alarm Profile is the complete set of the equipment alarms with their severity in case of Service
Affecting situation and No Service Affecting situation.

Each alarm has its Service Affecting and No Service Affecting attribute, which can differ according to the
Alarm Severity Profile.

N.B. To some objects in the equipment (overhead alarm, input housekeeping alarm, tributaries etc.)
can be assigned an Alarm Profile.
To do this association:
– select the tab panel (Equipment, Line Interface, FSO etc.) in which is present the object
to be associated to a specific Alarm Severity Profile;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– select the object;


– select the Configuration menu in the relevant Resource Detail Area;
– select in the Alarm Profile field the Alarm Profile to be associated.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 123 / 340

340
2–2.3.1 How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile

– Select in the screen of Fig. 55. on page 123 the Alarm Profile to be cloned.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


– Click the Clone pushbutton.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
– The screen of Fig. 56. on page 124 appears.

– Digit the name to be assigned to the new Alarm Profile and click on Apply.

Fig. 56. Name of a cloned alarm profile

– Select again the Alarm Severity option from the Configuration menu.

– Select the just created Alarm Profile (Link 1 in the example of Fig. 57. on page 124).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 57. Clone of an Alarm Severity Profile

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 124 / 340

340
– In this screen are available 4 buttons:

• Close: to close the screen without any change


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

• Rename: to change the name of the Alarm Severity Profile


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• Modify: to modify the Alarm Severity Profile

• Delete: to delete the Alarm Severity Profile.

– Click on the Modify button.

– To modify the severity of an alarm click on the Service Affecting field click on the suitable alarm and
select a new severity (see Fig. 58. on page 125).

Fig. 58. Selection of a new severity in the Service Affecting field


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 125 / 340

340
– To modify the severity of an alarm click on the No Service Affecting field click on the suitable alarm
and select a new severity (see Fig. 59. on page 126).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 59. Selection of a new severity in the No Service Affecting field

– To save the changes in the Alarm Severity Profile click on Apply. (By clicking on Cancel you quit the
Alarm Severity Profile screen without any change) (see Fig. 59. on page 126).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 126 / 340

340
2–2.4 System Settings

This menu allows the system configuration, providing the setting of all the parameters for the NE setup.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The main window provides 3 tabbed–panels, one for each type of function to be managed:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– NE configuration
– Overhead

WARNING: At the first configuration (i.e. with a flash card with an empty MIB) at the end of the
configuration the “Restart NE” must be performed (refer to para. 2–7.2 on page 190).

WARNING: Should during this procedure to be selected a wrong type (i.e. PSU4860 instead of
PSU24), to insert the correct type enter the System Settings menu → NE configuration
tab panel; select the correct type; click on Apply and then restart the EC by entering
menu Supervision and by activating command ”Restart NE”.

2–2.4.1 NE Configuration

The user can view and define the NE configuration by selecting the “NE Parameters” tabbed panel.
The window displayed in Fig. 60. on page 127 will appear.
The field “Type” contains all the allowed configurations supported for the NE. The operator choice will be
applied by selecting the related “Apply” button.
The “Structure” area displays the market, capacity and modulation and, if needed, the ability to change
it, according to NE market configured in the previous screen.
The field ”Market” contains the market type: ETSI or ANSI (refer to Tab. 3. on page 128). The operator
choice will be applied by clicking the related “Apply” button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 60. System Settings: NE configuration

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 127 / 340

340
Tab. 3. Radio application: Market, capacity and modulation

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Market Capacity Modulation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
2xE1 4QAM
4xE1 4QAM / 16QAM
ETSI 8xE1 4QAM / 16QAM
16xE1 4QAM / 16QAM
1xE3 4QAM / 16QAM
4xDS1 4QAM

ANSI 8xDS1 4QAM / 16QAM


(see Tab. 1. on page 14) 16xDS1 4QAM / 16QAM
1xDS3 4QAM / 16QAM

The information related to the modulation type is shown in the “Modulation” field. The possible values are
”4QAM” or ”16QAM”. The operator choice will be applied by clicking the related “Apply” button.

WARNING: When you change the modulation scheme (from 4 QAM to 16 QAM or vice–versa) the Tx
power (in case of operation with RTPC) and the ATPC range (in case of operation with
ATPC) of the new modulation scheme must be in the correct range (refer to para. 2–5.4
on page 176). If the value is out of range the relevant field in the RTPC & ATPC screen
appears empty (automatically is associated a default value, but this value is not displayed).
Fill the field with the suitable value.

The Capacity can be modified by selecting a different type according to Tab. 3. and then selecting the
”Apply” button to send the new value.

N.B. After a change in the “Type” or “Market” or “Capacity” or “Modulation” field the explicit
confirmation shown in Fig. 61. is requested.

Fig. 61. Confirmation message

N.B. Only one change can be performed in this screen.


When the user confirms the change in the “Type” or “Market” or “Capacity” or “Modulation” field
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

all the other fields are disabled. To perform another change close the screen and enter again.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 128 / 340

340
N.B. After a change in the “Type” or “Market” or “Capacity” or “Modulation” field (for the “Modulation”
only for the remote NE configuration) at the completion of the operation the CT forces the JUSM
closing with the following warning message (see Fig. 62. ).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 62. USM closing warning message

The “Tributary Port Configuration” area is in the lower part of the window. The “Impedance” field allows
the operator to configure the impedance of the E1/DS1 tributary (unbalanced 75 ohm or balanced 120ohm
for E1 tributary; balanced 100 ohm for DS1 tributary).

The impedance value will be applied by clicking on the related ”Apply” button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 129 / 340

340
2–2.4.2 Overhead

The ”Overhead” tabbed panel identifies the parameters for the management of the phone number and
auxiliary interface (Fig. 63. on page 130).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 63. Overhead Configuration

The field ”Phone Number” in the ”Order Wire Configuration” area allows the operator to read and write
the station number associated to the Engineering Order Wire to be used in the selective call. Possible
values are: 10–99.

N.B. Number 00 is the value associated to the general call.

The parameter will be sent to NE by clicking on the related “Apply” button.

The field ”Type” in the ”Auxiliary Interface Configuration” area allows the operator to change the
interface of the auxiliary channels.
The parameter will be sent to NE by clicking on the related “Apply” button.

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the Overhead alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default
alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 2–2.3.1 on page 124).
To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the
available Alarm Profiles.

N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 130 / 340

340
2–2.5 Quick Configuration Procedure

This procedure allows a full system configuration through a guided process, based on a reduced set of
screens. The related windows will be displayed by a “Wizard Tool” according to a specific order.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

To start this application, select the “Quick Configuration” option from the “Configuration” menu. The
window in Fig. 64. on page 132 will appear. This window is the first step of the procedure.

The procedure consists of different steps according to the configuration:

– 1+0 configuration:

• 6 steps for the simplified configuration

• 12 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step
5)

– 1+1 configuration:

• 7 steps for the simplified configuration

• 13 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can activated in step 6)

Note on the use of the buttons available in the screens:

– Back: by clicking on this button the procedure goes back to the previous step

– Next: by clicking on this button the procedure goes on the next step

– Finish: this button is active only in the last step. By clicking on this button the operator confirms the
configuration and the new parameters are sent to the equipment.

– Cancel: by clicking on this button the operator quits the procedure without any change in the
configuration.

– Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help–on line.

In the following is explained step by step the most complete procedure for 1+1 configuration.

WARNING: At the first configuration (i.e. with a flash card with an empty MIB) at the end of the
configuration the “Restart NE” must be performed (refer to para. 2–8.2 on page 160).

WARNING: Should during this procedure to be selected a wrong type (i.e. PSU4860 instead of
PSU24), to insert the correct type enter the System Settings menu → NE configuration
tab panel; select the correct type; click on Apply and then restart the EC by entering
menu Supervision and by activating command ”Restart NE”.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 131 / 340

340
For all steps of this procedure, with reference to items to be configured, please
refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWP–version
relationship

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Step 1 (NE Parameter configuration)

Fig. 64. Quick Configuration Procedure: NE Configuration (Step 1)

Step 1 provides a screen to configure two NE parameters:


– Market
– Type configuration.

The possible selections for the Type field are:


– 1+0 unprotected configuration
– 1+1 HSB: Hot Standby protected configuration
– 1+1 FD: Frequency Diversity protected configuration

N.B. Every type is available with the following tributaries:


– 8xE1/8xDS1
– 16xE1/16xDS1
– 1xE3/1xDS3
– 8xE1/8xDS1 + 2 Ethernet ports

and with the following Power Supply Units:


– ±24 V Power Supply
– ±48/±60 V Power Supply
– ±24/±60 V Power Supply (Full Range)

The market choice implies a first selection of possible frame structure. The type definition implies the
equipment configuration and other related functions: for example, the protection schemes supported.

N.B. For the Remote NE in this step the Type and the Market cannot be modified.
To modify them the System Settings menu must be used (refer to para. 2–2.4.1 on page 127).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

To go to step 2 click on button “Next”.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 132 / 340

340
Step 2 (Frame structure and modulation format)

The screen shown in Fig. 65. on page 133 provides the fields to set the Structure of the Frame
configuration (Capacity and Modulation).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The capacity implies the choice of modulation; for example, if the tributary structure is 2E1 (for ETSI
market) only 4QAM modulation scheme is supported.

N.B. The association between Capacity and Modulation is shown in Tab. 3. on page 128.

Moreover, the Impedance for the E1 tributary also must be selected in the Tributary Port Configuration
(unbalanced 75 ohm or balanced 120 ohm).

Fig. 65. Quick Configuration Procedure: Frame Configuration (Step 2)

In the screen displayed in Fig. 65. on page 133 (and in the following Steps), the “Back” button is enabled
also. It allows the operator to turn back and change the parameters configured in the previous screen.

N.B. For the Remote NE in this step the Capacity and the Modulation cannot be modified. To modify
them the System Settings menu must be used (refer to para. 2–2.4.1 on page 127).

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 133 / 340

340
Step 3 (Tributary configuration)

Step 3 allows the operator to choose, for each tributary configured, the signal mode or disable it
(Fig. 66. on page 134).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 66. Quick Configuration Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 3)

By clicking on the one facility button (“All Framed”, “All Unframed” and “All Disabled”), the operator can
configure all the tributaries with the same values; otherwise he can apply all configuration for each tributary
by selecting the related value from the relevant scroll list.

N.B. This procedure can be used also after the first configuration to perform multiple changes in the
configuration both in the local and in the remote NE.

WARNING: In case of the configuration with the two Ethernet ports some tributary ports must be at
least disabled in order to allow the transmission of the Ethernet data.
Refer to the following Table.

Market Capacity Number of disabled tributaries


2xE1 1
4xE1 1
ETSI
8xE1 1
16xE1 8
4xDS1 1
ANSI 8xDS1 1
(see Tab. 1. on page 14)
16xDS1 8

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 134 / 340

340
Step 4 (Automatic restoration criteria configuration)

Step 4 allows the operator to choose the restoration criteria (revertive or not revertive for the 3 possible
protections available in the 1+1 configuration (Fig. 67. on page 135):
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Radio Protection (Rx RPS–Hitless Switch)

– Mux/Demux Protection (Tx/Rx EPS)

– HSB Tx Protection (RF Hot Stand–by)

Fig. 67. Quick Configuration Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 4)

To go to the next step click on button “Next” . For:

– SWP version = 2.0.0, proceed to Step 5 on page 136

– SWP version > 2.0.0, proceed to Step 5 on page 137

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 135 / 340

340
Step 5 (Channel configuration) in Rel. 2.0.0

Step 5 allows the operator to define the basic parameters for each configured channel. The related screen
is shown in the Fig. 68. on page 136:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 68. Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5 in Rel. 2.0.0)

In the Channel Configuration area the ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled. If enabled, the other ATPC
parameters (min. value, max. value and Rx threshold) must be configured in RTPC & ATPC menu in the
Radio domain (refer to para. 2–5.4 on page 176).

If ATPC is disabled in the RTPC area the power (constantly transmitted) can be selected by writing the
suitable value in the Tx power field.

In the Frequency Value area the Tx operating frequency must be written in the Tx Freq field.

N.B. The Tx Frequency value can be changed only on the Local NE (To change the Tx frequency
for the Remote NE use the Radio menu – refer to para. 2–5.3 on page 173).

The Rx Frequency is automatically changed according to the frequency shifter available with the ODU.

All the values must be selected according to the relevant allowed ranges (shown between brackets).

N.B. In case of 1+1 HSB the choices will be applied to both “channels”. In case of 1+1FD, the same
screen will be re–proposed for channel 0 with the same choices applied for channel 1, with the
possibility to change the frequency, but without any possibility to change ATPC/RTPC selection.

To go to the next step 6 on page 138 click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 136 / 340

340
Step 5 (Channel configuration) from Rel. 2.0.1

Step 5 allows the operator to define the basic parameters for each configured channel. The related screen
is shown in the Fig. 69. on page 137:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 69. Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5 from Rel. 2.0.1)

In the Channel Configuration area the ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled. If enabled, the other ATPC
parameters (min. value, max. value and Rx threshold) must be configured in RTPC & ATPC menu in the
Radio domain (refer to para. 2–5.4 on page 176).
If ATPC is disabled in the RTPC area the power (constantly transmitted) can be selected by writing the
suitable value in the Tx power field.
The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF band and to the channel
arrangement. There are ODUs which can manage only one shifter (fixed shifter) or several predefined
shifters (flexible shifter).

ODU with one Shifter only


If the ODU can manage only one shifter the Shifter field in the menu is not available (it is grey).
In the Tx frequency field insert the Tx suitable frequency (the allowed Tx range is written in the
Frequency Range field on the right side) and press push–button Next (the Rx frequency is
automatically calculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter).
Note: During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: max 30’.

ODU with different available Shifters


1 ) In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency ...
2 ) ... then, in the Shifter field select the suitable shifter and press push–button Next (the Rx
frequency is automatically calculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter).
Note: During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: max 30’.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 137 / 340

340
Step 6 (Local configuration)

Step 6 performs the network configuration (Fig. 70. on page 138). This window allows to enter to IP
address associated to the F interface of the NE.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
N.B. The IP Address can be changed only on the Local NE (To change the IP Address for the
Remote NE use the menu Configuration → Network Configuration → Local Configuration
– refer to para. 2–2.2.1 on page 110).

Fig. 70. Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP Address (Step 6)

For an advanced network configuration the operator must select the “Advanced Configuration” flag.

If the flag has been selected, the screens in the next steps allow the operator to perform a complete
configuration of all the Network parameters.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 138 / 340

340
Step 7 (OSPF area configuration)

Step 7 allows to configure one or more OSPF Areas (3 areas max.) (Fig. 71. below).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 71. Quick Configuration Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step 7)

WARNING: Area 0 is managed and created by default with Id = 0 and IP address = 0.0.0.0

To create a new area write a number in the Area Id field, in the IP address field write the address and click
on Add button.

If the OSPF area must be a stub area, make the selection in the Stub Area check box.

In the upper part of the screen the new OSPF area will appear.

To remove or change an OSPF Area Configuration select the Area in the upper part and click on Remove
or Change button.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 139 / 340

340
Step 8 (IP static route configuration)

The following windows for Network Configuration allow the complete IP configuration.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Step 8 configures one or more Static Routers (Fig. 72. on page 140).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 72. Quick Configuration Procedure: IP Static Router Configuration (Step 8)

The following fields and data are present:

[1] Host Address: allows to define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host.

[2] Network Address: it is in alternative to the Host Address; allows to define the IP Mask to reach
a network.

[3] Gateway Address: allows to define the address of the next hop gateway.

[4] PPP: it allows to use the point to point interfaces (the 3 NMS channels) available
with the NE.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.

WARNING: No pending (open) static routes are allowed.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The default software uses first the static routes and then the dynamic routes. An open
static route is always considered as a preferential path.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 140 / 340

340
Step 9 (NMS RF channel configuration)

Step 9 allows the configuration of the NMS–RF channel (Fig. 73. on page 141):
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 73. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS–RF Interface Configuration (Step 9)

The “NMS–RF” interface is a communication interface based on the use of an in–frame RF proprietary
64 kbit/s channel. Through the “NMS–RF” interface the NE can exchange management messages with
a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station.

The NMS–RF channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS RF field.

If enabled, in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE.

In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select also the
associated OSPF area.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 141 / 340

340
Step 10 (NMS V11 channel configuration)

Step 10 allows the configuration of the NMS–V11 interface (Fig. 74. on page 142):

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 74. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS–V11 Interface Configuration (Step 10)

Through the “NMS–V11” interface the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft
Terminal) in the same station.

The NMS–V11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS V11 field.

If enabled, in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE.

In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select also the
associated OSPF area.

In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made:

– DTE mode:
to interface an SDH service channel, where DCE mode is not available because of the common
synchronization of the SDH network.

– Co–directional mode:
to allow the routing of the LUX40 NMS, avoiding the needed V11/Eth adapter or to link adjacent AWY.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 142 / 340

340
Step 11 (NMS G703 channel configuration)

Step 11 allows the configuration of the NMS–G703 interface (Fig. 75. on page 143):
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 75. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS–G703 Interface Configuration (Step 11)

Through the “NMS–G703” interface the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft
Terminal) in the same station.

The NMS–G703 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS G703 field.

If enabled, in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE.

In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select also the
associated OSPF area.

In the MODE field the following selections can be made:

– DTE mode:
to interface an SDH service channel, where DCE mode is not available because of the common
synchronization of the SDH network.

– Co–directional mode:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

to link adjacent AWY or to interface MUX based on 64 kbit/s, avoiding any V.11/G.703 adapter.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.


To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 143 / 340

340
Step 12 (Ethernet configuration)

Step 12 (Fig. 76. on page 144) allows to configure the Ethernet Interface.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 76. Quick Configuration Procedure: Ethernet Configuration (Step 12)

The Ethernet interface can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the Ethernet configuration field.

If enabled, in the relevant fields below enter the IP address, the IP mask and select the Routing IP
protocol. If the selected routing protocol has been OSPF, select also the area number in the Associated
OSPF Area field.

To go to the next step click on button “Next”.

To go back to the previous step click on button “Back”.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 144 / 340

340
Step 13 (Summary)

Step 13 is the last step. The screen shown summarizes all the parameters configured during this
procedure and some relevant parameters with default values (Fig. 77. on page 145).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 77. Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step 13)

All the parameters can still be changed by clicking on the “Back” button. The operator can navigate back
to the desired screen and set the new values.

At the end the operator can confirm the selections by pressing the “Finish” button. All the parameters will
be stored and sent to the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 145 / 340

340
2–2.6 Profiles management

N.B. this feature is available starting with SWP version V2.0.2.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2–2.6.1 Functional description

[1] Username and Password

An user is identified by a username and password with the following characteristics:

• Username length: the length must not be more than 20 characters.

• Password length: the length must not be less than six (6) characters under any circumstances
and must not be less than eight (8) characters for administrator user profile. Moreover the
password length must not be more than 20 characters.

• Password composition: the password must be composed of full ASCII characters set
(UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).

The CT provides User login procedures (with the Show Equipment action) with the username
displayed on the screen and the clear–text password not displayed on the screen. After 3 number
of consecutive unsuccessful NE login attempts, the CT interface closes the login procedure. To
access to the NE, a new Show Equipment action must be performed.

Each user is associated to a predefined profile.

[2] User number

Twenty–five (25) users at most can be created.

[3] User predefined profiles

The list of supported features for each user profile is shown clicking on Appendix Craft Terminal
Access Control in the Users Management help screen of Fig. 81. on page 149.
For each functionality on user profile: Full indicates that the related screen is visible both for SET
and GET operation; Read Only indicates that the related screen is visible, but only for GET
operations (to see the MIB objects); Not Supported indicates that the related screen is not visible.
The predefined profile are:

• Administrator (both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface)


This Operator can do everything on the NE.
This Operator can manage security features (to add/remove users or to change own password
and of all users).

• Constructor (only for OS interface)


This Operator can do everything on the NE also to access to the Manager List by–passing the
RM checks, but for this Operator some administration functions are disabled: for example the
Constructor cannot add or remove operators, and cannot do backup and restore.
This user profile is related only to OS system and so not stored on MIB NE. To manage NE, the
suitable menu items are enabled/disabled according to tables that can be viewed clicking on
Appendix Craft Terminal Access Control in the Users Management help screen of
Fig. 81. on page 149.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• Operator (both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface)


This Operator has in charge the operation at network level, not at radio site.
This Operator cannot add or remove users, but can change her/his own user password.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 146 / 340

340
This Operator cannot manage network configuration, only for NTP Configuration, due to
dangerous isolation of NE.
This Operator cannot either do quick configuration, or backup/restore, or restart NE. Also the
provisioning of equipment is not supported, as well the operations requiring the operator
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

presence on the radio site.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• craftPerson (only for CT/MibBrowser interface)


This Operator has in charge the installation and the maintenance at radio site.
This Operator can do everything on NE system, but cannot add or remove users. This Operator
can change only own user password.

• viewer (both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface)


This Operator can only explore the NE.
This Operator cannot add or remove users. This Operator can change own user password

All user predefined profiles can be connected to NE by a F interface (local serial interface) or by a
remote interface.

[4] NE scratch behavior

At installation time (NE scratch), a default Administrator user is created with (lower case):
• UserName= initial
• Password = initialing
The change of the password of this Administrator user is strongly suggested.

Further this initial user, the Administrator is allowed to create/delete users belonging to the
predefined profiles. The manager is prohibited from creating a user with username that already
exists.
The Administrator is allowed also to change user passwords (own or of all user by administrator).

[5] Reset NE behavior

All the security information sets (username/password/profile for each user) are stored on NE
database (MIB data base). After the NE reset, these information sets are not lost and are recreated
as before the NE reset.

Complete on–line information is available in the Users Management help screen of Fig. 81. on page 149.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 147 / 340

340
2–2.6.2 Change Password procedure

This procedure is available for all Operator Profiles, after the log–in (see para.2–1.3.1 on page 92)

Configuration ⇒ Profiles Management ⇒ Change Password

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


1)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 78. Profile Management options

2) Following screen appears; fill it with old and new passwords, taking into account password
characteristics listed in point [1] on page 146. New password will be active at next login (after
having logged out).

Fig. 79. Changing Password screen


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 148 / 340

340
2–2.6.3 Users Management procedure

This procedure is available to users with the Administrator profile only.

Configuration ⇒ Profiles Management ⇒ Users Management (see Fig. 78. on page 148)
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2) Following screen appears. Click on Help

Fig. 80. Users Management screen

3) Following screen appears. Click inside to explore matters and carry out the desired action.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 81. Users Management help screen

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 149 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
150 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–3 EQUIPMENT

This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for Equipment Management.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B. Please refer to Appendix A on page 289 for the detailed description of equipment functions and
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

components.

The equipment domain deals with the management of the NE as a whole and its physical components
(subrack, boards,..)

The main screen of the Equipment tab panel differs according to the configuration:

– Fig. 82. on page 152 for 1+0 configuration

– Fig. 83. on page 152 for 1+1 configuration.

In the Resource List Area is shown a graphical representation of the Equipment, which consists of one
IDU and one ODU in 1+0 configuration and two IDUs and two ODUs in 1+1 configuration.

The IDU consists of different boards according to the configuration: 8xE1/DS1, 16xE1/DS1, E3/DS3 with
or without the Ethernet ports.

A colored ball gives information on the status of the associated object (Equipment, ODU, IDU, IDU board).
The colour differs according to the severity of the alarms:

– Green: no alarm

– White: indetermination alarm active (not operative)

– Cyan: warning alarm active

– Yellow: minor alarm active

– Brown: major alarm active

– Red: critical alarm active


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 151 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Equipment Status

ODU
ODU Status

IDU

IDU Status

Fig. 82. 1+0 Equipment view

Equipment Status

ODU
Ch#0
ODU
Ch#1
ODU
Status

IDU/MAIN Ch #1
IDU Ch #0

IDU Status
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 83. 1+1 Equipment view

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 152 / 340

340
2–3.1 IDU level

To enter the IDU level click on the IDU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the IDU image
in the Resource Detail Area.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2–3.1.1 1+0 configuration

The screen in Fig. 84. on page 153 will appear.

IDU Status

IDU

MAIN BOARD
Status

Fig. 84. 1+0 IDU view

One IDU is present:

– IDU channel#1: the Main IDU.

The IDU channel#1 includes the IDU/Main Ch#1 object, which includes according to the configuration type
the following options:

– IDU/MAIN/DATA Ch#1 with the 2 Ethernet ports

– IDU/MAIN/8xE1/DS1 Ch#1 with the second group of 8xE1/DS1 trib. to implement the 16xE1/DS1
configuration

– IDU/MAIN/1xE3/DS3 Ch#1 with the E3/DS3 tributaries interface.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 153 / 340

340
2–3.1.2 1+1 configuration

The screen in Fig. 85. on page 154 will appear for the Ch#1 and the screen in Fig. 86. on page 155 will
appear for the Ch#0.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
IDU Status

IDU

MAIN BOARD
Status

Fig. 85. 1+1 IDU/MAIN Ch#1 view


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 154 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

IDU Status

IDU

Fig. 86. 1+1 IDU Ch#0 view

Two IDUs are present:

– IDU channel#1: the Main IDU

– IDU channel#0: the Extension IDU

The IDU channel#1 includes the IDU/Main Ch#1 object which includes according to the configuration type
the following options:

– IDU/MAIN/DATA Ch#1 with the 2 Ethernet ports (this board receives the power supply from the Main
IDU only).

– IDU/MAIN/8xE1/DS1 Ch#1 with the second group of 8xE1/DS1 trib. to implement the 16xE1/DS1
configuration

– IDU/MAIN/1xE3/DS3 Ch#1 with the E3/DS3 tributaries interface.

The IDU channel#0 includes the IDU/Ext Ch#0 object which includes according to the configuration type
the following options:

– IDU/EXT/8xE1/DS1 Ch#0 with the second group of 8xE1/DS1 trib. to implement the 16xE1/DS1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

configuration

– IDU/EXT/1xE3/DS3 Ch#0 with the E3/DS3 tributaries interface.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 155 / 340

340
2–3.1.3 Board level

To enter a board click on the object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the board image in the
Resource Detail Area.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
As example in Fig. 87. on page 156 is shown the screen of the MAIN IDU board.

BOARD Status

Fig. 87. Main board view


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 156 / 340

340
2–3.2 ODU level

To enter the ODU level click on the ODU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the ODU
image in the Resource Detail Area.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The screen in Fig. 88. on page 157 will appear.

Fig. 88. ODU view


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 157 / 340

340
2–3.3 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area

2–3.3.1 Alarms

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The Alarms tab panel provides the fault management, which checks the current state of alarms related
to the selected object (Fig. 89. on page 158).

Fig. 89. Alarm tab panel for a selected object

The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm, but only rows related to the active alarms are
highlighted. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen.

By putting a tick in the Include alarms from sub–nodes box the alarms currently active in the sub–nodes
of the object will also appear.

For every alarm the following information is given:

– Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile

– Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm

– Entity: the entity involved in the alarm

– Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm

– Managed Object Class: the class of the alarm.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 158 / 340

340
2–3.3.2 Configuration

The “User Label” field (Fig. 90. ) only display the label associated to the selected node in the tree.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the object alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 2–2.3.1 on page 124). To
associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available
Alarm Profiles.

N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.

Fig. 90. Configuration tab panel for a selected object

2–3.3.3 Remote Inventory

The information about the unit can be read in the Remote Inventory panel in the Resource Detail Area
as the following window shows (Fig. 91. on page 159):

Fig. 91. Remote Inventory tab panel for a selected object


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 159 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
160 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–4 LINE INTERFACE

This chapter describes the type of functions available for Line Interface Management.
The Line Interface domain deals with the management of the aggregate frame and tributary ports (line
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

side).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Line Interface menu allows the user to manage the resources of the line interfaces: PDH tributary,
NMS channel and Ethernet port, if has been configured.
This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 92. on page 161):

– Resource Tree Area: displays the tributary ports sorted by the channel number and the NMS
interfaces.

– Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area.

– Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the selected object’ s properties in list
area. This area performs the available functions for involved resource.

Fig. 92. Line Interface View

In the Resource List Area is given the information related to the tributaries or to the NMS channels:
– Type Interface (E1/DS1 or E3/DS3, Ethernet, NMS 64 kbit/s channel)
– Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port
– Channel Number: the number of a channel
– Rate/Modulation: the bit rate of the tributary
– Signal Mode: the type of frame (Unframed/Framed/Disabled)

To configure a line interface select the interface in the Resource Tree Area and configure the Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

tab panel in the Resource Detail Area.

N.B. In the Resource Tree Area below the Tributary PDH line are shown all the E1/DS1 tributaries
according to the capacity selected in the System Setting menu or in Quick Configuration menu.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 161 / 340

340
2–4.1 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area

2–4.1.1 Alarm

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The fault management checks the current state of alarms related to the selected tributary.

It is provided by the alarm panel like the one explained in para. 2–3.3.1 on page 158.

WARNING: The GFP alarm (alarm present in the Ethernet data interface) if active is shown not in this
tab panel, but in the Alarm tab panel of the Radio menu.

2–4.1.2 Configuration

There are different tab panels according to the type of interface:

– PDH interface (para. 2–4.1.2.1 on page 162)


– NMS interface (para. 2–4.1.2.2 on page 167)
– Ethernet interface (para. 2–4.1.2.3 on page 167)

2–4.1.2.1 Tributaries PDH Configuration tab panel

2–4.1.2.1.1 ETSI Market

The window, shown in Fig. 93. on page 162 for E1 tributary and Fig. 94. on page 162 for E3 tributary,
performs all the available functions for a PDH tributary port.

Fig. 93. Line Interface View: E1 Tributary Port


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 94. Line Interface View: E3 Tributary Port

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 162 / 340

340
In Fig. 93. on page 162 and Fig. 94. on page 162 the following fields are read–only fields:

– Interface Type (E1, E3)


– Port Number: identifies the ports for a given channel and type of port
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

– Channel Number
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The fields, which can be changed, are:

– Signal Mode
– Line RAI Insertion
– Radio RAI Insertion
– Alarm Profile

Signal Mode (for E1 tributary)

The possible values are:

– Framed for the framed received signal


– Unframed for the unframed received signal
– Disabled

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.

WARNING: In case of the configuration with the two Ethernet ports some E1 ports must be at least
disabled in order to allow the transmission of the Ethernet data.
Refer to the following Table.

Capacity Number of disabled E1 tributaries


2xE1 1

4xE1 1

8xE1 1

16xE1 8

Signal Mode (for E3 tributary)

The possible values are:

– Framed G.751 for the framed received signal


– Framed G.753 for the framed received signal (not applicable)
– Unframed for the unframed received signal
– Disabled

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 163 / 340

340
Line RAI Insertion (for E1 tributary only)

This feature is available for framed signals only.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


This field refers to the insertion of the RAI signal in Tx side. The possible alternative values are:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
– Forced: the RAI insertion is performed
– Enabled: the RAI insertion is possible.

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.

Radio RAI Insertion (for E1 tributary only)

This feature is available for framed signals only.

This field refers to the insertion of the RAI signal in Rx side. The possible alternative values are:

– Forced: the RAI insertion is performed


– Enabled: the RAI insertion is possible.

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.

Alarm Profile

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the tributary alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm
profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 2–2.3.1 on page 124). To
associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available
Alarm Profile.

N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 164 / 340

340
2–4.1.2.1.2 ANSI Market

Note: refer to Tab. 1. on page 14.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The window, shown in Fig. 95. on page 165 for DS1 tributary and Fig. 96. on page 165 for DS3 tributary,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

performs all the available functions for a tributary port.

Fig. 95. Line Interface View: DS1 Tributary Port

Fig. 96. Line Interface View: DS3 Tributary Port

In Fig. 95. on page 165 and Fig. 96. on page 165 the following fields are read–only fields:

– Interface Type (DS1, DS3)


– Port Number: identifies the ports for a given channel and type of port
– Channel Number

The fields, which can be changed, are:

– Signal Mode
– Line Coding (AMI/B8ZS : for DS1 tributary only)
– Line length (0–133, 133–266, 266–399, 399–533, 533–655 : for DS1 tributary only)
– Alarm Profile

Signal Mode (for DS1 tributary)

The possible values are:

– Framed SF for the Super Framed received signal


– Framed ESF for the Extended Super Framed received signal
– Unframed for the unframed received signal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– Disabled

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 165 / 340

340
WARNING: In case of the configuration with the two Ethernet ports some tributary ports must be at
least disabled in order to allow the transmission of the Ethernet data.
Refer to the following Table.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Capacity Number of disabled DS1 tributaries

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
4xDS1 1
8xDS1 1
16xDS1 8

Signal Mode (for DS3 tributary)

The possible values are:

– Framed for the framed received signal


– Unframed for the unframed received signal
– Disabled

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.

Line Coding (for DS1 tributary only)

This field refers to the coding relevant to the tributary signal. The possible values are:

– B8ZS
– AMI

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.

Line Length (for DS1 tributary only)

This field refers to the length of the connected line. The possible values are:

– 0–133
– 133–266
– 266–399
– 399–533
– 533–655

The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the ”Apply”
button to send the new value to NE.

Alarm Profile

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the tributary alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm
profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 2–2.3.1 on page 124). To
associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available
Alarm Profile.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 166 / 340

340
2–4.1.2.2 NMS interfaces Configuration tab panel
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 97. Line Interface View: NMS interface

For the NMS 64 kbit/s channels only the Alarm Profile can be associated.

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the interface alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default
alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator in menu Configuration –> Alarm
Severities. To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection
among the available Alarm Profile.

N.B. The default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.

2–4.1.2.3 Tributaries Data Configuration tab panel

The Ethernet interfaces can be configured according to two different modalities: manual (or default type)
mode (auto–negotiation is disabled) or automatic mode (auto–negotiation is enabled). In automatic mode
a mechanism of auto–sensing (the auto–negotiation) of the parameters involved is activated. These
parameters are negotiated with the remote Ethernet interface.

The following items resume the features supported:

– the rate (10 or 100 Mb/s) is always configurable independently of the modality (manual or automatic);

– the directionality is always full–duplex (no carrier control mechanism is implemented to use
the half–duplex mode);

– when the auto–negotiation process fails or when the auto–negotiation parameters are changed, the
auto–negotiation restart command has to be performed in order to have new configured parameters
effective.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 167 / 340

340
1 – Configuration menu

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 98. Line Interface View: Ethernet Port

In this menu the Ethernet port can be Enabled or Disabled and the Errored Frames can be discarded in
Tx side and in Rx side. To each Ethernet port can also be associated an Alarm Profile.

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the interface alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default
alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator in menu Configuration –> Alarm
Severities. To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection
among the available Alarm Profile.

WARNING: In case of the configuration with the two Ethernet ports some tributary ports must be at
least disabled in order to allow the transmission of the Ethernet data.
Refer to the following Table.

Market Capacity Number of disabled tributaries

2xE1 1
4xE1 1
ETSI
8xE1 1
16xE1 8
4xDS1 1
ANSI
8xDS1 1
(see Tab. 1. on page 14.)
16xDS1 8

N.B. The default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.

To confirm the new configuration click on Apply.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 168 / 340

340
2 – Auto–negotiation
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 99. Line Interface View: Ethernet Port auto–negotiation

In this menu the Auto–negotiation protocol regarding the Ethernet port can be Enabled or Disabled.

To confirm the new configuration click on Apply.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 169 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
170 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–5 RADIO

The Radio domain view allows the user to manage the resources of the radio transmission channel.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

A Radio NE consists of one or two radio channels with a set of functional blocks (tributary ports, radio ports
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

etc).

This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 100. on page 171):

– Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.

– Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.

– Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the object’ s properties selected in the
list area. This area enables to execute the available functions for involved resource.

Fig. 100. Radio Domain View

Five tab panels are present in the Resource Detail Area:

– Alarms: shows the active alarms (refer to para. 2–5.1 on page 172)
– Configuration: configures some radio parameters (refer to para. 2–5.2 on page 172)
– Frequency: sets the Tx RF frequency (refer to para. 2–5.3 on page 173)
– RTPC & ATPC: sets the manual operation parameters or the automatic operation parameters (refer
to para. 2–5.4 on page 176)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– Power Meas: performs the Tx and Rx power measurements (refer to para. 2–5.5 on page 179).

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 171 / 340

340
2–5.1 Alarm

The fault management allows to check the current state of alarms related to the selected object.
It is provided by the alarm panel like that shown in para. 2–3.3.1 on page 158.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2–5.2 Configuration

The window shown in Fig. 101. on page 172 performs all the available functions for a Radio channel.
To define the involved port, first select the port/channel in the tabular view: this selection enables the
“Resource Detail list” to show the available functions for the single resource.

Fig. 101. Radio Configuration menu

2–5.2.1 Local or Remote Transmitter Mute

The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the “Tx Mute” field. To change the transmitter
status choose the desired value (ON for Tx Squelched and OFF for Tx not Squelched) and press the
related “Apply” button.

WARNING: The Tx Remote Mute automatically works (”on” and then “off”) only if performed on the
local NE (i.e. the NE to which the CT is connected). When a remote Tx mute is executed,
the EC changes the channel in mono–directional way, in order to have the possibility to
send the command to remove the mute. If the Network Element has been restarted after
a MUTE, there is no more possibility to set–up the channel, because the remote address
is not known, and, in any case, to set–up the channel a bidirectional communication is
needed. The only way to remove the MUTE command is with local CT or from a remote
CT which can reach the Network Element through another supervisory interface.

2–5.2.2 ODU service kit

This field is a read–only field, which displays the state of the Portable Service Kit (connected or not to the
ODU).

2–5.2.3 Alarm Profile

The field Alarm Profile allows to associate a particular Alarm Profile to the object alarms: a default alarm
profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 2–2.3.1 on page 124). To
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and select among the available Alarm
Profile.
N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 172 / 340

340
2–5.3 Frequency

– For SWP version = 2.0.0, refer to para.2–5.3.1 below


– For SWP version > 2.0.0, refer to para.2–5.3.2 on page 174
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2–5.3.1 Frequency menu in Rel. 2.0.0

This menu (Fig. 102. on page 173) allows to read and, if necessary, to set the frequency parameters.
The information shown concerns the port/channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.

Fig. 102. Radio Frequency menu in Rel. 2.0.0

2–5.3.1.1 Tx Radio Frequency

The ”Tx Freq” field in the “Frequency Value” area of tabbed window (Fig. 102. on page 173) shows the
current value of the transmission radio frequency (expressed in kHz). To change this parameter write the
new value in the field and press the ”Apply” button.
The new value must be within the allowed radio frequency range. The allowed range is shown in “Min/Max
Value” fields.

N.B. During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: max. 30’.

2–5.3.1.2 Rx Radio Frequency

The ”Rx Freq” field in the “Frequency Value” area of the tabbed window (Fig. 102. on page 173) shows
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

the current value of the receive radio frequency (expressed in kHz).


It is automatically changed as a consequence of the definition of the Tx frequency according to the
Frequency Shifter.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 173 / 340

340
2–5.3.2 Frequency menu from Rel. 2.0.1

This menu (Fig. 103. on page 174) allows to read and, if necessary, to set the frequency parameters.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 103. Radio Frequency menu from Rel. 2.0.1

The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF band and to the channel
arrangement. There are ODUs which can manage only one shifter (fixed shifter) or several predefined
shifters (flexible shifter).

2–5.3.2.1 ODU with one Shifter only

If the ODU can manage only one shifter the Shifter field in the menu is not available (it is grey).

In the Tx frequency field insert the Tx suitable frequency (the allowed Tx range is written in the Frequency
Range field on the right side) and press push–button Apply (the Rx frequency is automatically calculated
by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter).

Note: During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: max 30’.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 174 / 340

340
2–5.3.2.2 ODU with different available Shifters

In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency and press push–button Apply.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In the Shifter field select the suitable shifter and press push–button Apply (the Rx frequency is
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

automatically calculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter).

Now the Rx frequency can be changed in order to implement a suitable new shifter. Insert the new value
(± 5 MHz respect to the value previously automatically calculated) in the Rx frequency field and press
push–button Apply.

WARNING: The Rx frequency must be ± 5 MHz respect to the value automatically calculated according
to the Tx frequency and to the shifter.

When the Rx frequency is changed a specific warning message about possible impact on the traffic will
appear. This message requires an explicit confirmation to proceed.

At the end a specific result message appears to inform the operator that the operation has been completed
(or failed in case of failure).

At this point other operations can be normally requested by the operator.

WARNING: Whenever the difference (as absolute value) between Rx and Tx frequencies is different
from the shifter value, the background of the Shifter field changes to red color and a
specific warning message is written on the Frequency screen as shown in Fig. 104. :
“WARNING: Frequency parameters are not aligned to standard configuration
associated to the selected Shifter.
For more information, refer to technical handbook” (N.B.)
N.B. Information present from Ed.02 of Technical Handbook.

Fig. 104. Not standard frequency arrangement

To restore a “Standard Shifter” configuration, the operator has only to apply again the selected (or another
one) Shifter value or to apply again the Tx frequency.

As result, the normal Frequency screen is restored removing both red color as background of the Shifter
field and the specific warning message.

Note: During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: max 30’.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 175 / 340

340
2–5.4 RTPC & ATPC

This menu (Fig. 105. on page 176) allows to read and, if necessary, to set the Tx power parameters.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The shown information is related to the channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Static value of the Tx power
(30 dB range)
Dynamic value of the Tx power
ATPC Rx Threshold
(20 dB range)

Fig. 105. Rtpc & Atpc

WARNING: When you change the modulation scheme (from 4 QAM to 16 QAM or vice–versa) the Tx
power (in case of operation with RTPC) and the ATPC range (in case of operation with
ATPC) of the new modulation scheme must be in the correct range. If the value is out of
range the relevant field in the RTPC & ATPC screen appears empty (automatically is
associated a default value, but this value is not displayed).
Fill the field with the suitable value.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 176 / 340

340
2–5.4.1 ATPC

The ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The new value will be applied when the ”Apply” button is pressed. If the ATPC has been enabled, the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ATPC Range and ATPC Rx Threshold fields must be filled.

WARNING: In 1+1 Configuration (HST or FD) the ATPC information, sent back from the Rx side to Tx
side, is the information relevant to the channel (protecting or protected) currently active
in the EPS protection scheme. The two transmitters are, therefore, driven by the same
ATPC control signal.

[1] ATPC Range

The Min Value and Max Value, for Tx Range in the ATPC management, are shown in the Atpc
Range area. The min and max level can be changed by writing the new value in the field.

When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.

[2] ATPC Rx Threshold

The value of the power low threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field.
When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.

WARNING: During the reconfiguration phase or during the activation of a new software the alarm
“ATPC loop” is active.

It is recommended to use the following Tab. 4. (for ETSI) and Tab. 5. (for ANSI) in order to
set the ATPC threshold. The ATPC shape is calculated using the following max capacity:
• E3 for ETSI
• DS3 for ANSI

Tab. 4. ATPC Range Rx Threshold for ETSI


TH 7/8 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 25 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz
Min
–73 –74 –74 –72 –72 –71 –71 –70
4 Value
QAM Max
–60 –60 –60 –60 –55 –50 –50 –50
Value
Min
–69 –70 –70 –68 –68 –67 –67 –66
16 Value
QAM Max
–60 –60 –60 –60 –55 –50 –50 –50
Value
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 177 / 340

340
Tab. 5. ATPC Range Rx Threshold for ANSI
15 18 23 38
TH
GHz GHz GHz GHz

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Min
–72 –70 –70 –66
4 Value
QAM Max
–60 –60 –55 –50
Value
Min
–68 –66 –66 –62
16 Value
QAM Max
–60 –59 –55 –50
Value

The applied rule is:

ATPC Rx threshold setting


Frequency Band
Min Value Max Value
7/8, 13, 15 & 18 GHz PRxth + 8 dB –60 dBm
23 GHz PRxth + 8 dB –55 dBm
25 & 38 GHz PRxth + 8 dB –50 dBm
PRxth: Received power level correspondent to BER 10–6 according to modulation scheme,
payload and ETSI/FCC standard

2–5.4.2 RTPC

[1] Nominal Power

The Nominal Value field in the “RTPC” area is a read–only field and shows the nominal value of the
transmitted power (expressed in dBm).

[2] Tx Power

The Tx Power field in the RTPC area shows the current value of Tx power (expressed in dBm), when
the ATPC is disabled. In this case, it is possible to modify this value ERROR FREE in ATPC Range
(Pnom –20 dB) with 2 dB max step allowed, by writing the new value and by pressing the related
Apply button

N.B. During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: < 15’.

The new value must be within the allowed transmitted power range. This range is shown in the Power
Value label of RTPC area.

If the ATPC is enabled, the Tx power value cannot be modified.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 178 / 340

340
2–5.5 Power Measurement

The Power Measurements capability is performed through the “Power Meas” tabbed panel in the resource
detail view (Fig. 106. on page 179).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 106. Power Measurements

The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.

“Measurement interval” fields allow the operator to set the time–duration of the measurement. The
default is Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7–day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed
interval.

“Sample time” field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among
2, 6, 30, 60 sec.

The last section of the dialog is referred to an optional Log file.

By selecting Create File the log file is created and a default path and name for this file is displayed to the
operator. The file is stored in the ALCATEL/CT–Kv3.0.1 directory.

N.B. The file name must not include the following characters: \ ? : * “ < > |.

The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension ( 7 days
for a 2 s sample time).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

By clicking on the ”Start“ button the screen “ Power Measurement Graphic “ appears (see Fig. 106. on
page 179).

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 179 / 340

340
The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to the NE.

The screen in Fig. 107. shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the local NE.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Through this screen the operator can see, in real time, the power transmitted by the local and remote

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
transmitter (Tx) and the power received by the local and remote receiver (Rx).

The top graphic screen area shows the TX curves (local and remote), while the bottom area shows the
Rx curves (local and remote). Note that the colors represent the linked end–point of the two NE; for
example, if the local TX is blue, the remote receiver will also have the same color.

The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement:

– Radio port: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analyzed;
– Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE;
– Start time: is the first request time;
– Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the start time;
– Time: is the current response time;
– Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.

Fig. 107. Power Measurement Graphic

By clicking on “Show details” box, on the left side of the Power Measurement Graphic (see Fig. 107. on
page 180), a new table appears (Fig. 108. on page 181); this table shows the following relevant values
of the received and transmitted power:

– Tx Local End
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

• max TX local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
• min. TX local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
• current TX local value and its current date.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 180 / 340

340
– Tx Far End
• max TX remote value and date when this value was received for the first time.
• min. TX remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
• current TX remote value and its current date.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Rx Local End
• max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
• min. Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
• current Rx local value and its current date.

– Rx Far End
• max Rx remote value and date when this value was received for the first time.
• min. Rx remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
• current Rx remote value and its current date.

N.B. PTx and PRx levels software readings tolerance is:


– PTx = Real Value ± 3dB
– PRx = Real Value ± 5dB

Fig. 108. Power Meas Details

WARNING:
– If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99, the Transmitter is off (or in HST Configuration the
transmitter is in standby).
– If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99 and, at the same time, in the relevant Rx end field
the information in dBm is –99, probably the supervision has been lost. The confirmation of the loss
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

of the supervision is given by a broken red icon in NES screen.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 181 / 340

340
2–5.5.1 How to read a Power Measurement file

Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button. The directory of the CT automatically opens
to navigate and get the power measurement file.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
N.B. as default, the measurement files are stored in the ALCATEL/CT–Kv3.0.1 directory and have
extension .txt.

Fig. 109. Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen

Select the desired file and click the Start button in Fig. 106. on page 179 to open the file.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 110. Example of “Power Measurement File Reading“

The button in the lower part of the window allow to flow the graph within the measurement interval.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 182 / 340

340
Select the .txt file and click with the mouse right push–button to open .txt file with a text editor (e.g.
WordPad) and to see the power information in tabular mode (see Fig. 111. on page 183).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 111. Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad)


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 183 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
184 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–6 EXTERNAL POINTS

This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for External Points Management.
There are two types of external points: input and output external points.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

By clicking on the tree root, displayed in Fig. 112. on page 185, the tree will be expanded according to the
equipment configuration.
A single left click selection of a tree element causes the activation of the corresponding Tabular
representation displayed in the ”Resource list area”. A click on a row in the Resource list area opens the
Configuration menu in the Resource Detail Area. An example of this mechanism is displayed in the
Fig. 112. on page 185.

2–6.1 Input External Points

An input external point is described by the following parameters (Fig. 112. on page 185):

– Id: identification number


– UserLabel: associates a user–friendly name to an external point
– Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened)
– External State: describes the state (on /off)
– Alarm Profile: describes the associated Alarm Profile

The lower part provides the possible parameters, which can be modified; after a row selection, the user
can modify the User Label, the Polarity and can associate a different Alarm Profile by clicking on the
Selection button.
The operator choices will be sent to NE after selecting the “Apply” button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 112. Input External Point View

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 185 / 340

340
2–6.2 Output External Points

Seven output external points are available:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The first four external points (CPO#1, 2, 3, 4) (Fig. 113. on page 186) are described by the following

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
parameters:

– Id: identification number

– UserLabel: a user–friendly name can be associated to an external point

– Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened). In this field the polarity of the external
point can be changed.

– Criteria: Manual or Automatic. The output can be activated manually by the CT by selecting Manual
(Fig. 113. on page 186) or automatically by selecting Automatic (Fig. 114. on page 187). In this case
a new field appears (Event) in which it is possible to select the alarm, the generation of which will
cause the activation of the external point output.

– External State: describes the state (on /off). In this field the external point can be activated (on) or
deactivated (off).

The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the “Apply” button.

Fig. 113. Output External Points: CP01 ... CP04 (Manual activation)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 186 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 114. Output External Points: CP01 ... CP04 (Automatic activation)

The last three external points (FAIL IDU, FAIL ODU Ch.#1, FAIL ODU Ch.#0) (Fig. 115. on page 188)
are described by the following parameters:

– Id: identification number

– UserLabel: a user–friendly name can be associated to an external point

– Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened). In this field the polarity of the external
point can be changed.

N.B. These three output external points are automatically activated when the relevant equipment
summarizing alarm is active.

The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the “Apply” button.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 187 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
Fig. 115. Output External Points View: FAIL IDU, FAIL ODU

188 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–7 SUPERVISION

2–7.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the competition of the OS and the
CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.

If the LAC is ”access denied”, it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify
the NE configuration (it can only “read”). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.

If the LAC is “granted”, it means that the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, the icon with a key
symbol has a rectangular shape.

If the LAC is ”requested”, it means that the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting for
a replay.

However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include:

– Alarm reception and processing,

– Performance processing,

– Switching back to the OS access state.

The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:

2–7.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State
cascading menu as shown in the following figure.

Fig. 116. Configuration of the Craft access state from the Equipment NE view in the OS mode

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the ”Craft access” operation
using the Yes or No pushbutton. The request is sent up to the OS which accepts or refuses it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

If the OS doesn’t answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state
and can be managed by a Craft Terminal.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 189 / 340

340
2–7.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then from the Access State cascading menu select the OS
option.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the ”OS access” operation.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
The NE is now managed by the OS.

N.B. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is
managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.

N.B. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the
NE. When the communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the
communication and forces the state existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft
Terminal access can be denied or granted).

2–7.2 Restart NE

The RESTART operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.

From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option.

Fig. 117. Restart NE call

The following dialogue box opens.

Fig. 118. Restart NE confirmation

Click the OK button to confirm the restart N.E. operation

Click the Cancel button to abort the restart N.E. operation.

WARNING: After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW reset
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

push–button) the LLM icon is frozen and the supervision of the local NE and the remote
NEs is lost.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 190 / 340

340
2–7.3 MIB Management

This menu (Fig. 119. on page 191) refers to the management of the MIB (Management Information Base).
The MIB includes all the system configuration data, except the routing configuration data:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1. Local configuration ⇒ System’s local address

2. NTP server configuration

3. Interface configuration ⇒ NMS configuration


⇒ Ethernet configuration

4. IP configuration ⇒ IP Static Routing configuration


⇒ OSPF Area configuration
⇒ IP Address configuration of point to point configuration

Fig. 119. MIB Management

The routing configuration data are NOT stored into the MIB file, because considered unique to a particular
system in a network and are NOT meant to be reproduced on other systems in the same network, because
will cause conflicts in the supervision network centre.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 191 / 340

340
2–7.3.1 Backup

This menu (Fig. 120. on page 192) allows to save on the CT the NE configuration. To backup the
configuration write the filename in the Backup field (Lower part) and press Confirm Backup.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
WARNING: The backup file name must not include the following characters: space, &, /.

Fig. 120. Backup screen

Confirm the backup operation to start the operation.

In the upper part appears the list of the previously created backups.

By pressing Refresh the list is updated with the insertion of the just created backup.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 192 / 340

340
2–7.3.2 Restore

This menu (Fig. 121. on page 193) allows to download to the NE a previously created backup.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 121. Restore screen

Select one of the backups to be downloaded in the upper part and press Confirm Restore.

(By pressing the Reset push–button the previous selection is cancelled and a new selection can be made).

Confirm the restore operation to start the operation.

To activate the new configuration enter command MIB Management ––> Activate.

2–7.3.3 Activate

This command (Fig. 122. on page 193) allows to activate the configuration just downloaded with the
restore.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 122. Activate command

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 193 / 340

340
2–7.3.4 Remove file

This menu allows to remove from the list of the backups one particular backup.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


To remove a backup select the backup file in the upper part and press Confirm Remove.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Confirm the operation to start the operation.

By pressing Refresh the list of backups in the upper part of the screen is updated.

2–7.4 SW key

From the Supervision cascading menu, select the SW key option.

In this screen the type of the key (stored in the flash card installed in the Main IDU unit) is shown.

Fig. 123. SW key screen


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 194 / 340

340
2–8 PROTECTION SCHEMES

This domain is present in 1+1 configuration only.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 124. on page 195):
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.

– Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.

– Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
enable to perform the available functions for involved resource.

By clicking on the tree root displayed in Fig. 124. on page 195, the tree will be expanded according to
protection schemes supported.

Fig. 124. Protection Schemes

A single left click selection of an element tree causes the activation of the corresponding Graphical
representation displayed in the “Resource list area”. An example of this mechanism is displayed in the
following figure (Fig. 125. on page 196).

Three 1+1 protection schemes have been implemented:

– Mux/Demux protection: EPS protection in Tx and Rx sides


– Radio protection: RPS Hitless Switch in Rx side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

– HST protection: Hot Stand–by protection

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 195 / 340

340
To see the current position of the switches enter the menu Diagnosis –> Summary Block Diagram View
(refer to para. 2–10.4 on page 218).

– Mux/Demux protection corresponds to the Switch Tx and the Rx output switch in Fig. 149. on page

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


220 or Fig. 151. on page 221

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
– The Radio protection corresponds to the Switch RPS HS in Fig. 149. on page 220 or Fig. 151. on
page 221

– The HST protection is implemented in the ODU: one Transmitter is connected to the antenna
(active), the other transmitter is in stand–by. Refer to Fig. 149. on page 220. The HST protection
is available only if the HST configuration has been selected.

2–8.1 Mux/Demux Protection Management

The Equipment Protection Management is performed by selecting Mux/Demux Protection tree element.

The following window (Fig. 125. on page 196) allows a complete view of all Ne resource involved in the
EPS protection:

– Schema Parameters

– Channels Parameters

To read the
correct
indication
on the switch
status press
here to refresh
the screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Fig. 125. Mux Protection

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 196 / 340

340
2–8.1.1 Schema Parameters

The window “Schema Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modify.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The Schema parameters are:


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported type
is: 1+1, e.g. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare).

– Operation type: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected channel is allowed
(revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode).

The operator choice for “Operation Type” will be applied by clicking on “Apply” button.

2–8.1.2 Commands

To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view (Fig. 126. on page 197)
or on the Main #1 element (Fig. 127. on page 198).

Fig. 126. Mux Protection Switch (Spare #0)


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 197 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 127. Mux Protection Switch (Main #1)

The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout, Forced
and Manual.

Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel),
independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN.

Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service
Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN.

Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands
generated by the logic.

Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic
switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is
active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN.

Tab. 6. Command priority list


Command Priority
Lockout 1
Forced 2
Automatic switch 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Manual 4

N.B. to release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 198 / 340

340
2–8.2 Radio Protection Management

The Radio Protection Management is performed by selecting the Radio Protection element tree.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The following window (Fig. 128. on page 199) allows a complete view of all Ne resource involved in a RPS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

protection:

– Rx Static Delay

– Schema Parameters

– Channels Parameters

To read the
correct
indication
on the switch
status press
here to refresh
the screen

Fig. 128. Radio Protection View


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 199 / 340

340
2–8.2.1 Rx Static Delay

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 129. Rx Static Delay menu

The Rx Static Delay must be compensated during the installation.

Two compensating modes are possible:

– Automatic

– Manual

The two modes are alternative.

To activate the Automatic mode click on the Align push–button (the compensation procedure is
automatically done).

To activate the Manual mode:

[1] click on the Start push–button;

[2] write the values in the Channel 0/1 fields (N.B.);

[3] click on the Apply push–button to send the value to the NE.

N.B. Write in one field the suitable value (in range 0–31) and in the other field write 0.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 200 / 340

340
2–8.2.2 Schema Parameters

The window “Schema Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modify.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The Schema Parameters are:


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– ”Protection Type” field: defines the protection schema architecture: 1+1 Hitless;

– ”Operation Type” field: the possible values are revertive (automatic restoration allowed) or
notRevertive (automatic restoration Inhibited).

2–8.2.3 Commands

To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view (Fig. 130. on page 201)
or on the Main #1 element (Fig. 131. on page 202).

Fig. 130. Radio Protection Switch (Spare #0)


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 201 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 131. Radio Protection Switch (Main #1)

The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout, Forced
and Manual.

Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel),
independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN.

Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service
Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN.

Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands
generated by the logic.

Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic
switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is
active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN.

Tab. 7. Command priority list


Command Priority
Lockout 1
Forced 2
Automatic switch 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Manual 4

N.B. to release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 202 / 340

340
2–8.3 HST Transmission Protection Management

The Transmission Protection Management is performed selecting Transmission Protection element tree.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The following windows (Fig. 132. on page 203) allows a complete view of all Ne resource involved in a
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

TPS protection:

– Schema Parameters

– Channels Parameters

To read the
correct
indication
on the switch
status press
here to refresh
the screen

Fig. 132. Transmission Protection View

2–8.3.1 Schema Parameters

The window “Schema Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modify.

The Schema parameters are:

– Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported type
are: 1+1 (onePlusOne) ,e.g. a working element is protected by one protecting unit.

– Operation type: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected unit is allowed
(revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode).

The operator choice for “Operation Type” will be applied clicking on “Apply” button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 203 / 340

340
2–8.3.2 Commands

To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element (Fig. 133. on page 204) or on the Main #1
element (Fig. 134. on page 205) in the Tree view.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 133. Tx Protection Commands (Spare #0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 204 / 340

340
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 134. Tx Protection Commands (Main #1)

The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout, Forced
and Manual.

Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation connects to the antenna Transmitter 1 (default
transmitter), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN.

Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command connects to the
antenna Transmitter 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling
ABN.

Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands
generated by the logic.

Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic
switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is
active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN.

Tab. 8. Command priority list


Command Priority
Lockout 1
Forced 2
Automatic switch 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

Manual 4

N.B. to release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 205 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
206 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–9 LOOPBACKS

The functions described in this section allow to perform the test operations.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This domain view consists of the following areas:


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Resource Tree Area: displays the object on which the loopbacks can be performed, sorted by
number.

– Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the loopback supported by the resource
selected in tree area.

– Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
enable to perform the available functions for involved resource.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 207 / 340

340
2–9.1 Available Loopbacks

2–9.1.1 1+0 Loopbacks

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
N.B. The loopbacks can be activated on the local NE only.

N.B. The DATA block in Fig. 135. is present with the Ethernet port option only.

CT

IDU ODU ODU IDU

DATA DATA
MUX/ MODEM RF RF MODEM MUX/
DEMUX DEMUX
TRIB TRIB

2 4 5 6 3
1

Fig. 135. 1+0 available loopbacks

Tab. 9. 1+0 loopbacks

CT selection in
Loopbac Ref. to Loopback
No. the Resource Location Note
k name Fig. type
Tree Area

E1/DS1
1 Port#xx or Tributaries Fig. 138. Near End External line Input loopback at tributary level.
E3/DS3

E1/DS1 Loopback toward the remote


2 Port#xx or Tributaries Fig. 138. Near End Internal station at tributary level.
E3/DS3 Not available.

E1/DS1
Loopback in the remote station
3 Port#xx or Tributaries Fig. 138. Far End Internal
at tributary level.
E3/DS3

Loopback at the IDU output at


4 IDU cable Channel 1 Fig. 138. Near End External line
aggregate level.

ODU Loopback at the ODU input at


5 Channel 1 Fig. 138. Near End External line
cable aggregate level.

RF local loopback.
6 RF Channel 1 Fig. 138. Near End External line
(Note 1)

Note 1: Before activating this loopback the Remote Tx must be muted (Menu Radio –> Configuration)

Note 2: For the DS1/DS3 tributaries refer to Tab. 1. on page 14.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 208 / 340

340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 136. Channel 1 Loopback View

Fig. 137. Tributaries Loopback View

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
209 / 340
In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.

In this area the following information is given:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


– Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
– Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.

– Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End/Far End)

– Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/Internal IF/External Line)

– Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)

– Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)

In Fig. 138. on page 210 is given the association of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the
block diagram of the equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the
Diagnosis menu.

4 IDU
CABLE

1 Tributaries 5 ODU 6 Radio


(External Line) CABLE port
(RF loop)

2 Channel
(External Line)

Fig. 138. 1+0 Loopback types


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 210 / 340

340
2–9.1.2 1+1 Loopbacks

N.B. The loopbacks can be activated on the local NE only.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

N.B. The DATA block in Fig. 139. is present with the Ethernet port option only.

CT

IDU ODU ODU IDU

DATA DATA
MUX/ MODEM RF RF MODEM MUX/
DEMUX DEMUX
TRIB TRIB

2 4 5 6 3
1

Fig. 139. 1+1 available loopbacks

Tab. 10. 1+1 loopbacks

CT selection in
Loopbac Ref. to Loopback
No. the Resource Location Note
k name Fig. type
Tree Area

E1/DS1
1 Port#xx or Tributaries Fig. 142. Near End External line Input loopback at tributary level.
E3/DS3

E1/DS1 Loopback toward the remote


2 Port#xx or Tributaries Fig. 142. Near End Internal station at tributary level.
E3/DS3 Not available.

E1/DS1
Loopback in the remote station
3 Port#xx or Tributaries Fig. 142. Far End Internal
at tributary level.
E3/DS3

Loopback at the IDU output at


4 IDU cable Channel 0 or 1 Fig. 142. Near End External line
aggregate level.

ODU Loopback at the ODU input at


5 Channel 0 or 1 Fig. 142. Near End External line
cable aggregate level.

RF local loopback.
6 RF Channel 0 or 1 Fig. 142. Near End External line
(Note 1)

Note 1: Before activating this loopback the Remote Tx must be muted (Menu Radio –> Configuration).

Note 2: For the DS1/DS3 tributaries refer to Tab. 1. on page 14.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 211 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03
Fig. 140. Channel 1 Loopback View

Fig. 141. Tributaries Loopback View

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
212 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.

In this area the following information is given:


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

– Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.

– Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End/Far End)

– Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/Internal IF/External Line)

– Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)

– Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)

In Fig. 142. on page 213 is given the association of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the
block diagram of the equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the
Diagnosis menu.

4 IDU ODU Radio port


CABLE 5 CABLE 6 (RF loop)

1 Tributaries
(External Line)

2
Channel
(External Line)

Fig. 142. 1+1 Loopback types


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 213 / 340

340
2–9.2 How to activate a loopback

N.B. For the loopbacks relevant to Ch. 0 and Ch.1 all the switches must be forced/lockout to the
related Channel; for the Tributaries loopbacks must only be forced to the radio switch to Channel

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


0 or lockout to Channel 1.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
To activate a loopback:

[1] Select the suitable loopback to be activated by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree
Area or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.

[2] The screen in Fig. 143. on page 214 will appear. (In this screen has been selected the loopback on
tributary E1, Near End).

Fig. 143. Loopback activation

[3] Select Active in the Activation field.

[4] Click on Apply.

[5] The Loopback is now ACTIVE (in the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant
loopback will change from Not Active to Active).

WARNING:
When the Loopback commands start the Craft Terminal is not “frozen”. Before to set another command
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

is recommended to wait 120 to 160 seconds minimum.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 214 / 340

340
2–9.3 How to remove a loopback

To deactivate loopbacks use the following steps:


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

[1] Select the suitable loopback to be removed by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Area or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.

[2] The screen in Fig. 144. on page 215 will appear. (In this screen has been selected the loopback on
tributary E1, Near End).

Fig. 144. Loopback removing

[3] Select Not Active in the Activation field.

[4] Click on Apply.

[5] The Loopback is now DEACTIVATED (in the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the
relevant loopback will change from Active to Not Active).

WARNING:
When the Loopback commands start the Craft Terminal is not “frozen”. Before to set another command
is recommended to wait 10 to 25 seconds.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 215 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
216 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–10 DIAGNOSIS

In the Diagnosis menu four options are available as shown in Fig. 145.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 145. Diagnosis menu

2–10.1 Log Browsing

In the Diagnosis pull–down menu, select the Log Browsing option.

The proposed options:

– Select the Alarm Log option to access the Alarm Log file.

The Alarm Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the alarms stored in the NE.
Refer to the “ELB Operator’s Handbook”.

– Select the Event Log option to access the Event Log file.

The Event Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the events stored in the NE.
Refer to the “ELB Operator’s Handbook”.

– Software Trace Log option is reserved to the Alcatel technicians.

2–10.2 Remote Inventory

This screen is a read–only screen, which shows all the information on the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 217 / 340

340
2–10.3 Abnormal Condition List

The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions (i.e.
the manual operations) currently active in the NE.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The abnormal conditions can be:

– Switch commands Forced or Lockout


– Loopback
– Tx power manual operation
– Tx muting (manual or automatic)
– ODU service kit connected

2–10.4 Summary Block Diagram View

The “Summary Block Diagram View” of the Diagnosis menu displays a global logical view (strictly
related to the physical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in
the system (ODU+IDU).

This window also shows a logical view of the signal flowing through the functional block and switches.

Line (and arrow) trace changes in compliance with the current switch status. By clicking on the objects
of the drawing shown in the figure the operator can navigate to the specific view to perform maintenance
operation (for example specific alarm details, equipment details, manual switches, loopback (L),
performance monitoring (P).

The Summary Block Diagram View depends on the configuration:


– 1+0 with or without the Ethernet ports (see Fig. 146. on page 219, Fig. 147. on page 219)
– 1+1 HST with or without the Ethernet ports (see Fig. 148. on page 220, Fig. 149. on page 220)
– 1+1 FD with or without the Ethernet ports (see Fig. 150. on page 221, Fig. 151. on page 221)

In detail, it is possible to:

– navigate from Alarm indicator to related “Alarm Synthesis”;


– navigate from External Point indicator to “External Point” view;
– navigate from Switch indicator to related “Protection Scheme” view;
– navigate from Loopback indicator to specific “Loopback” view; for example, by clicking on (L)
indicator of main board (Ch#1) the operator can navigate to loopback view for PDH tributaries;
– navigate from Performance indicator to specific “Performance” view; for example, by clicking on
(P) indicator (line side) the operator can navigate to “Current Data” view;
– navigate from ODU box to the ”radio view” with automatic selection of the related channel.

To refresh the screen press the Refresh button.

N.B.
• Loopback indicator: yellow letter L means active loop.
• Performance indicator: yellow letter P means active performance.

N.B. In the 1+1 configuration the current position of the switches is also shown.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 218 / 340

340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
Fig. 147. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 with Ethernet ports
Fig. 146. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 without Ethernet ports

219 / 340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
Fig. 149. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HST with Ethernet ports
Fig. 148. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HST without Ethernet ports

220 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
Fig. 151. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 FD with Ethernet ports
Fig. 150. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 FD without Ethernet ports

221 / 340
By pressing the Refresh button the refresh of the screen takes place (active loopback and performance
and position of the switch).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2–10.5 Current Configuration View

This screen is a read–only screen, which shows the current configuration of the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 222 / 340

340
2–11 PERFORMANCE MONITORING

This chapter describes the functions to provide Performance Monitoring management. It explains the
procedures that the operator must perform in order to activate a PM process.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2–11.1 General information on the performance monitoring process

The performance monitoring (PM) gives indication on the quality of the service.
Quality of service PM is performed in accordance with G.826 and G.784.
It is assumed that the quality of the single tributary (E1, DS1, …) can be derived from the quality of the
aggregate signal, therefore no dedicated quality of service PM is foreseen on the single tributaries.
Considering one section (see below), one current register is for 15 min report and one for 24 h report; 96
history data can be stored for 15 min report and 8 history data for 24 h report.

N.B. The 15 min Performance Monitoring data are stored in the History Data report only if errors
have been occurred.
The 24 h Performance Monitoring data are always stored in the History Data report.

The radio section monitored is:

– Radio Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section
– Radio Link Section: the section identifying the protected section.

PROPR. FEC MODEM MODEM FEC PROPR.


FRAMING ENCODE RF RF DECODE FRAMING

Radio Hop (before the switch)

Radio Link (after the switch)

Fig. 152. Radio sections

The counters supported are the following:

– Errored Seconds
– Severely Errored Seconds
– Background Block Error
– Unavailable Seconds

The primitives used for the hop section quality monitoring is the Reed–Solomon (RS) decoder (block size:
2040 bits). The following table provides, for each frame structure, the main features useful to define a SES.

Tab. 11. SES Thresholds


E3 16E1 8E1 4E1 2E1 DS3 16DS1 8DS1 4DS1
Gross bit rate [MHz] 39,168 39,168 19,584 9,792 4,896 57,120 28,560 14,280 7,140
RS Blocks number/sec. 19200 19200 9600 4800 2400 28000 14000 7000 3500
SES Threshold (Note 1) 5760 5760 2880 1440 720 8400 4200 2100 1050
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

(Note 1) Note that according to ITU–T G.826 a second is declared Severely Errored Second if it is a
second period with more than 30 % of errored blocks or at least one defect.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 223 / 340

340
The flow chart shown below illustrates the recognition of anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES
according to ITU–T G.826 (12/2002).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Monitored
second

Yes
Defects?

No

No
Anomalies?

Yes

Yes
%EB ≥ 30? SES
(and therefore an ES)

ES
(but not a SES) No

Path in Path in N
No
available available
State? State?

Yes Yes

cES = cES + 1 cES = cES + 1

cBBE = cBBE + EB(s) cSES = cSES + 1

T1313790–98

End

Fig. 153. Anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITU–T G.826
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 224 / 340

340
2–11.2 Performance menu

The performance view allows the user to activate and monitor the PM process on the selected object.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 154. on page 225):
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Resource Tree Area: displays the threshold for measurement and the object monitoring sorted by
channel number.

– Resource List Area: displays the PM management for the selected resource in the tree area.

Fig. 154. Performance View

The performance reports can be of 2 different types:

– 15 minutes

– 24 hours

The following description explains the functions to provide the PM process with a granularity period of 15
min. The same functions are provided for 24h PM process.

The PM are of HOP or LINK type. The current report can be seen (and configured) and the history PM log
can be seen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 225 / 340

340
With reference to Fig. 155. on page 226 to see (and configure) the current report:

[1] click on HOP channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) to see the HOP report or click
on LINK to see the LINK report

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
[2] click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)

[3] click on CD (Current Data).

With reference to Fig. 155. on page 226 to see an history log:

[1] click on HOP channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) to see the HOP report or click
on LINK to see the LINK report

[2] click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)

[3] click on the desired HD (History Data).

To each PM can be associated a threshold table. To associate a threshold table click on HOP or LINK in
the Resource Tree Area in Fig. 155.

Fig. 155. Threshold table association screen

In the Counter Thresholds field select the threshold to be associated and click on Apply.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

To associate an Alarm Profile click on the selection box. The Alarm Severity profile screen opens. Select
one of the Profiles available. Click on Apply. Click on Apply on the 15min&24h Tab panel.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 226 / 340

340
2–11.3 CD (Current Data)

The window displayed in Fig. 156. on page 227 allows to start and to read the 15min PM report and 24h
PM report.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 156. Current Data View


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 227 / 340

340
2–11.3.1 CD parameters

The fields displayed in the upper part of Fig. 156. on page 227 allow the operator to check and manage
the parameter of the current data collection.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
– “Suspect interval” shows whether the current data are suspect or not.

– “Elapsed Time” field (read–only) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring.

– “End Period”: display time of the PM in the graphical description and in the tabular description in
the upper part of the screen. By pressing the Refresh button this time changes.

– “Max Interval supp.”: max. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History
because they don’t have errors.

– “Num. Interval supp.”: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they don’t
have errors.

N.B. An interval is defined as “suspect“ if at least one of the following conditions occurs in the
collection period:

– the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time
– loss of the PM data in the equipment
– performance counters have been reset during the interval.

2–11.3.2 CD Counters

The fields and buttons displayed in the lower part of Fig. 156. on page 227 (Counters Area) allow the
management of performance events.

In the left part of Counters Area, there is a graphical description of the event counter value:

– BBE (Errored block)


– ES (Errored second)
– SES (Severely Errored Second)
– UAS (Unavailable second)

N.B. These values refer to the last refresh performed by pressing the Refresh button.

In the right part of Fig. 156. on page 227, there are button choice to perform action on the current data
collection:

– “Reset” button resets the data collection and related counters.

– “Start” button starts the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been stopped.

– ”Refresh” button makes a refresh of the counters.

– “Stop” button stops the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been started.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 228 / 340

340
2–11.4 HD (History Data)

The PM process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i.e. 15min) and stores their values
in history data. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Data and deleted when the relative CD is deleted.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

2–11.4.1 HD Parameters

The table displayed on the following window (Fig. 157. on page 229) collects the history data for a related
PM report.

Fig. 157. History Data

The table columns hold the value of following parameters:

– End Period: End period of the relevant report

– Elapsed time: elapsed time in the related interval

– Suspect interval: this field describes whether the History Data is suspect or not.

– Counters: the last columns hold the counters value (BBE, ES, SES, UAS).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 229 / 340

340
2–11.5 Threshold tables

This section describes how to see or change or create the threshold tables assigned to PM counters.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


There are threshold tables for the HOP and for the LINK.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
There are two default tables: threshold 1 and 2.

To view the available threshold for PM process, the operator must select the Thresholds Tables node
tree in the Resource Tree Area of the Performance View.

N.B. For the association of the threshold tables to the PM refer to para. 2–11.5.3 “Threshold table
association”.

2–11.5.1 How to change a threshold table

Fig. 158. Threshold table

Click on the threshold in the Resource Tree Area in the Resource List Area: the threshold screen will
appear.

In the upper part of the screen, the Name field displays the name assigned to the threshold table.

In the lower part of the screen, low and high threshold for each counter is shown. To change them, the
operator must edit the new values in the table fields and click on the Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 230 / 340

340
2–11.5.2 How to create a threshold table
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 159. Thresholds Table creation

Click on Threshold Tables HOP (or LINK) node tree in the Resource Tree Area of the Performance view.
The Threshold Data Creation screen will appear.

In the upper part write the name of the new table.

In the lower part write the values for the Low and High thresholds.

To create the new table click on Create.

2–11.5.3 Threshold table association

To each PM can be associated a Threshold Table.

To associate a Threshold Table click on HOP–Channel#0 (or Channel#1) or on LINK in the Resource
Tree Area. The 15min&24h tab panel will appear.

In the Counter Thresholds field select the threshold to be associated and click on Apply.

To associate an Alarm Profile click on the selection box. The Alarm Severity profile screen opens. Select
one of the Profiles available. Click on Apply. Click on Apply on the 15min&24h Tab panel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 231 / 340

340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED
03

340
3DB 06687 CA AA
232 / 340
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2–12 SW DOWNLOAD

2–12.1 Server Access Configuration


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This menu allows to configure the FTP server to be used to download the SWP to the NE.

N.B. The complete procedure to download the SWP to the NE is shown in para. 1–3.3 on page 68.

Fig. 160. Server access configuration screen

User Id and Password are the login information to access the FTP server.

In the Address field write the IP address of the FTP server.

In the Port field write the port to be used and in the Root Directory field write the directory into which the
software has been downloaded.

By clicking on the Use System Default button a screen will appear showing the default configuration.

The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:

– User Id: ftp


– Password: ftp
– Address: IP address of the F interface or IP address of the Ethernet interface, if present.
– Port: 15,000

N.B. the System Default can be changed by writing different values in the fields and then by clicking
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

on button OK.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 233 / 340

340
2–12.2 Init SW Download

N.B. The first part of the procedure to download the SW to the NE is shown in para. 1–3.3 on page
68.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Through this menu software is downloaded to the NE in order to upgrade the NE software version.

To start download select the desired software version and click on the Init download button.

N.B. This screen displays the software packages previously stored through the menu Supervision
–> Files Administration –> Software Administration available in the NES menu.

The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.e. the complete description file is downloaded
to the NE).

If the Forced download is not selected, the system shall first proceed to compare the software to be
downloaded with the software present in the NE. Then only the differences are downloaded.

Fig. 161. Init Software Download screen

Recommended operation: Before to start the software download it is recommended to disable the
ATPC operation (if it has been enabled) and to set in RTPC mode the max.
Tx power.

When the SW download starts a screen, showing the in progress operation of the download, appears.
Download is aborted when the Abort button is pressed.

WARNING: The download time from the CT to the NE flash is 25–30 min. approx.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

At 50% of this time starts the download to the first ODU, which lasts 15–20 min. approx.
At the end of this time interval starts the download of the second ODU, if present, which
lasts 15–20 min.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 234 / 340

340
2–12.3 SW Status

This menu allows to display the information of the software installed in the NE.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The following information is displayed:


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

– Name: software name

– Version: software version

– Operational state: enabled or disabled

– Current status: committed or standby. The committed status refers to the software currently in use.

By clicking on the Software Units Status button the screen of Fig. 162. on page 235 opens, giving
additional information on the software package.

Fig. 162. SW Status screen


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 235 / 340

340
The following information is displayed on the screen:

– EC: software on the Equipment Controller

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


– OC_R: software on the ODU Controller (Radio) (The total download time of the ODU software is 17

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
to 20 min approx. with some SES after 15 seconds from the activation) (Note 1)

– FFENI, FGAIA, FGAEX, FMEDU, FPONT: FPGA firmware version (Note 1)

Note 1: during the download of the ODU and FPGA software arises the alarm “Firmware Download On
Going”. This alarm disappears when the download is over. The download lasts 2 minutes for
every FPGA starting from the activation of the alarm.

Fig. 163. SW Unit Status screen

The Flash card, which stores the NE software, contains 2 banks.

The 2 banks can store 2 different software versions. One bank will be committed (active) and the other
bank will be standby.

N.B. The second bank will appear when a new software package has been downloaded the first time.

During download, necessary to update the software version, the download file is automatically stored in
the standby bank.

To activate the new version first check the operational status of the standby bank. If the status is enabled
(this means that download took place without errors) select Activation or Forced Activation in the
Software Management Action field and click on the Apply Action button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

By selecting Forced Activation the bank to be activated is forced to restart.

By selecting Activation the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ.

ED 03

3DB 06687 CA AA 236 / 340

340
2–13 MIB MANAGEMENT